summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/macros/latex/contrib/revtex/source/revtex4-2.dtx
blob: 243266a70962c08972879b1b8b4e5c945adc15d8 (plain)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
991
992
993
994
995
996
997
998
999
1000
1001
1002
1003
1004
1005
1006
1007
1008
1009
1010
1011
1012
1013
1014
1015
1016
1017
1018
1019
1020
1021
1022
1023
1024
1025
1026
1027
1028
1029
1030
1031
1032
1033
1034
1035
1036
1037
1038
1039
1040
1041
1042
1043
1044
1045
1046
1047
1048
1049
1050
1051
1052
1053
1054
1055
1056
1057
1058
1059
1060
1061
1062
1063
1064
1065
1066
1067
1068
1069
1070
1071
1072
1073
1074
1075
1076
1077
1078
1079
1080
1081
1082
1083
1084
1085
1086
1087
1088
1089
1090
1091
1092
1093
1094
1095
1096
1097
1098
1099
1100
1101
1102
1103
1104
1105
1106
1107
1108
1109
1110
1111
1112
1113
1114
1115
1116
1117
1118
1119
1120
1121
1122
1123
1124
1125
1126
1127
1128
1129
1130
1131
1132
1133
1134
1135
1136
1137
1138
1139
1140
1141
1142
1143
1144
1145
1146
1147
1148
1149
1150
1151
1152
1153
1154
1155
1156
1157
1158
1159
1160
1161
1162
1163
1164
1165
1166
1167
1168
1169
1170
1171
1172
1173
1174
1175
1176
1177
1178
1179
1180
1181
1182
1183
1184
1185
1186
1187
1188
1189
1190
1191
1192
1193
1194
1195
1196
1197
1198
1199
1200
1201
1202
1203
1204
1205
1206
1207
1208
1209
1210
1211
1212
1213
1214
1215
1216
1217
1218
1219
1220
1221
1222
1223
1224
1225
1226
1227
1228
1229
1230
1231
1232
1233
1234
1235
1236
1237
1238
1239
1240
1241
1242
1243
1244
1245
1246
1247
1248
1249
1250
1251
1252
1253
1254
1255
1256
1257
1258
1259
1260
1261
1262
1263
1264
1265
1266
1267
1268
1269
1270
1271
1272
1273
1274
1275
1276
1277
1278
1279
1280
1281
1282
1283
1284
1285
1286
1287
1288
1289
1290
1291
1292
1293
1294
1295
1296
1297
1298
1299
1300
1301
1302
1303
1304
1305
1306
1307
1308
1309
1310
1311
1312
1313
1314
1315
1316
1317
1318
1319
1320
1321
1322
1323
1324
1325
1326
1327
1328
1329
1330
1331
1332
1333
1334
1335
1336
1337
1338
1339
1340
1341
1342
1343
1344
1345
1346
1347
1348
1349
1350
1351
1352
1353
1354
1355
1356
1357
1358
1359
1360
1361
1362
1363
1364
1365
1366
1367
1368
1369
1370
1371
1372
1373
1374
1375
1376
1377
1378
1379
1380
1381
1382
1383
1384
1385
1386
1387
1388
1389
1390
1391
1392
1393
1394
1395
1396
1397
1398
1399
1400
1401
1402
1403
1404
1405
1406
1407
1408
1409
1410
1411
1412
1413
1414
1415
1416
1417
1418
1419
1420
1421
1422
1423
1424
1425
1426
1427
1428
1429
1430
1431
1432
1433
1434
1435
1436
1437
1438
1439
1440
1441
1442
1443
1444
1445
1446
1447
1448
1449
1450
1451
1452
1453
1454
1455
1456
1457
1458
1459
1460
1461
1462
1463
1464
1465
1466
1467
1468
1469
1470
1471
1472
1473
1474
1475
1476
1477
1478
1479
1480
1481
1482
1483
1484
1485
1486
1487
1488
1489
1490
1491
1492
1493
1494
1495
1496
1497
1498
1499
1500
1501
1502
1503
1504
1505
1506
1507
1508
1509
1510
1511
1512
1513
1514
1515
1516
1517
1518
1519
1520
1521
1522
1523
1524
1525
1526
1527
1528
1529
1530
1531
1532
1533
1534
1535
1536
1537
1538
1539
1540
1541
1542
1543
1544
1545
1546
1547
1548
1549
1550
1551
1552
1553
1554
1555
1556
1557
1558
1559
1560
1561
1562
1563
1564
1565
1566
1567
1568
1569
1570
1571
1572
1573
1574
1575
1576
1577
1578
1579
1580
1581
1582
1583
1584
1585
1586
1587
1588
1589
1590
1591
1592
1593
1594
1595
1596
1597
1598
1599
1600
1601
1602
1603
1604
1605
1606
1607
1608
1609
1610
1611
1612
1613
1614
1615
1616
1617
1618
1619
1620
1621
1622
1623
1624
1625
1626
1627
1628
1629
1630
1631
1632
1633
1634
1635
1636
1637
1638
1639
1640
1641
1642
1643
1644
1645
1646
1647
1648
1649
1650
1651
1652
1653
1654
1655
1656
1657
1658
1659
1660
1661
1662
1663
1664
1665
1666
1667
1668
1669
1670
1671
1672
1673
1674
1675
1676
1677
1678
1679
1680
1681
1682
1683
1684
1685
1686
1687
1688
1689
1690
1691
1692
1693
1694
1695
1696
1697
1698
1699
1700
1701
1702
1703
1704
1705
1706
1707
1708
1709
1710
1711
1712
1713
1714
1715
1716
1717
1718
1719
1720
1721
1722
1723
1724
1725
1726
1727
1728
1729
1730
1731
1732
1733
1734
1735
1736
1737
1738
1739
1740
1741
1742
1743
1744
1745
1746
1747
1748
1749
1750
1751
1752
1753
1754
1755
1756
1757
1758
1759
1760
1761
1762
1763
1764
1765
1766
1767
1768
1769
1770
1771
1772
1773
1774
1775
1776
1777
1778
1779
1780
1781
1782
1783
1784
1785
1786
1787
1788
1789
1790
1791
1792
1793
1794
1795
1796
1797
1798
1799
1800
1801
1802
1803
1804
1805
1806
1807
1808
1809
1810
1811
1812
1813
1814
1815
1816
1817
1818
1819
1820
1821
1822
1823
1824
1825
1826
1827
1828
1829
1830
1831
1832
1833
1834
1835
1836
1837
1838
1839
1840
1841
1842
1843
1844
1845
1846
1847
1848
1849
1850
1851
1852
1853
1854
1855
1856
1857
1858
1859
1860
1861
1862
1863
1864
1865
1866
1867
1868
1869
1870
1871
1872
1873
1874
1875
1876
1877
1878
1879
1880
1881
1882
1883
1884
1885
1886
1887
1888
1889
1890
1891
1892
1893
1894
1895
1896
1897
1898
1899
1900
1901
1902
1903
1904
1905
1906
1907
1908
1909
1910
1911
1912
1913
1914
1915
1916
1917
1918
1919
1920
1921
1922
1923
1924
1925
1926
1927
1928
1929
1930
1931
1932
1933
1934
1935
1936
1937
1938
1939
1940
1941
1942
1943
1944
1945
1946
1947
1948
1949
1950
1951
1952
1953
1954
1955
1956
1957
1958
1959
1960
1961
1962
1963
1964
1965
1966
1967
1968
1969
1970
1971
1972
1973
1974
1975
1976
1977
1978
1979
1980
1981
1982
1983
1984
1985
1986
1987
1988
1989
1990
1991
1992
1993
1994
1995
1996
1997
1998
1999
2000
2001
2002
2003
2004
2005
2006
2007
2008
2009
2010
2011
2012
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
2021
2022
2023
2024
2025
2026
2027
2028
2029
2030
2031
2032
2033
2034
2035
2036
2037
2038
2039
2040
2041
2042
2043
2044
2045
2046
2047
2048
2049
2050
2051
2052
2053
2054
2055
2056
2057
2058
2059
2060
2061
2062
2063
2064
2065
2066
2067
2068
2069
2070
2071
2072
2073
2074
2075
2076
2077
2078
2079
2080
2081
2082
2083
2084
2085
2086
2087
2088
2089
2090
2091
2092
2093
2094
2095
2096
2097
2098
2099
2100
2101
2102
2103
2104
2105
2106
2107
2108
2109
2110
2111
2112
2113
2114
2115
2116
2117
2118
2119
2120
2121
2122
2123
2124
2125
2126
2127
2128
2129
2130
2131
2132
2133
2134
2135
2136
2137
2138
2139
2140
2141
2142
2143
2144
2145
2146
2147
2148
2149
2150
2151
2152
2153
2154
2155
2156
2157
2158
2159
2160
2161
2162
2163
2164
2165
2166
2167
2168
2169
2170
2171
2172
2173
2174
2175
2176
2177
2178
2179
2180
2181
2182
2183
2184
2185
2186
2187
2188
2189
2190
2191
2192
2193
2194
2195
2196
2197
2198
2199
2200
2201
2202
2203
2204
2205
2206
2207
2208
2209
2210
2211
2212
2213
2214
2215
2216
2217
2218
2219
2220
2221
2222
2223
2224
2225
2226
2227
2228
2229
2230
2231
2232
2233
2234
2235
2236
2237
2238
2239
2240
2241
2242
2243
2244
2245
2246
2247
2248
2249
2250
2251
2252
2253
2254
2255
2256
2257
2258
2259
2260
2261
2262
2263
2264
2265
2266
2267
2268
2269
2270
2271
2272
2273
2274
2275
2276
2277
2278
2279
2280
2281
2282
2283
2284
2285
2286
2287
2288
2289
2290
2291
2292
2293
2294
2295
2296
2297
2298
2299
2300
2301
2302
2303
2304
2305
2306
2307
2308
2309
2310
2311
2312
2313
2314
2315
2316
2317
2318
2319
2320
2321
2322
2323
2324
2325
2326
2327
2328
2329
2330
2331
2332
2333
2334
2335
2336
2337
2338
2339
2340
2341
2342
2343
2344
2345
2346
2347
2348
2349
2350
2351
2352
2353
2354
2355
2356
2357
2358
2359
2360
2361
2362
2363
2364
2365
2366
2367
2368
2369
2370
2371
2372
2373
2374
2375
2376
2377
2378
2379
2380
2381
2382
2383
2384
2385
2386
2387
2388
2389
2390
2391
2392
2393
2394
2395
2396
2397
2398
2399
2400
2401
2402
2403
2404
2405
2406
2407
2408
2409
2410
2411
2412
2413
2414
2415
2416
2417
2418
2419
2420
2421
2422
2423
2424
2425
2426
2427
2428
2429
2430
2431
2432
2433
2434
2435
2436
2437
2438
2439
2440
2441
2442
2443
2444
2445
2446
2447
2448
2449
2450
2451
2452
2453
2454
2455
2456
2457
2458
2459
2460
2461
2462
2463
2464
2465
2466
2467
2468
2469
2470
2471
2472
2473
2474
2475
2476
2477
2478
2479
2480
2481
2482
2483
2484
2485
2486
2487
2488
2489
2490
2491
2492
2493
2494
2495
2496
2497
2498
2499
2500
2501
2502
2503
2504
2505
2506
2507
2508
2509
2510
2511
2512
2513
2514
2515
2516
2517
2518
2519
2520
2521
2522
2523
2524
2525
2526
2527
2528
2529
2530
2531
2532
2533
2534
2535
2536
2537
2538
2539
2540
2541
2542
2543
2544
2545
2546
2547
2548
2549
2550
2551
2552
2553
2554
2555
2556
2557
2558
2559
2560
2561
2562
2563
2564
2565
2566
2567
2568
2569
2570
2571
2572
2573
2574
2575
2576
2577
2578
2579
2580
2581
2582
2583
2584
2585
2586
2587
2588
2589
2590
2591
2592
2593
2594
2595
2596
2597
2598
2599
2600
2601
2602
2603
2604
2605
2606
2607
2608
2609
2610
2611
2612
2613
2614
2615
2616
2617
2618
2619
2620
2621
2622
2623
2624
2625
2626
2627
2628
2629
2630
2631
2632
2633
2634
2635
2636
2637
2638
2639
2640
2641
2642
2643
2644
2645
2646
2647
2648
2649
2650
2651
2652
2653
2654
2655
2656
2657
2658
2659
2660
2661
2662
2663
2664
2665
2666
2667
2668
2669
2670
2671
2672
2673
2674
2675
2676
2677
2678
2679
2680
2681
2682
2683
2684
2685
2686
2687
2688
2689
2690
2691
2692
2693
2694
2695
2696
2697
2698
2699
2700
2701
2702
2703
2704
2705
2706
2707
2708
2709
2710
2711
2712
2713
2714
2715
2716
2717
2718
2719
2720
2721
2722
2723
2724
2725
2726
2727
2728
2729
2730
2731
2732
2733
2734
2735
2736
2737
2738
2739
2740
2741
2742
2743
2744
2745
2746
2747
2748
2749
2750
2751
2752
2753
2754
2755
2756
2757
2758
2759
2760
2761
2762
2763
2764
2765
2766
2767
2768
2769
2770
2771
2772
2773
2774
2775
2776
2777
2778
2779
2780
2781
2782
2783
2784
2785
2786
2787
2788
2789
2790
2791
2792
2793
2794
2795
2796
2797
2798
2799
2800
2801
2802
2803
2804
2805
2806
2807
2808
2809
2810
2811
2812
2813
2814
2815
2816
2817
2818
2819
2820
2821
2822
2823
2824
2825
2826
2827
2828
2829
2830
2831
2832
2833
2834
2835
2836
2837
2838
2839
2840
2841
2842
2843
2844
2845
2846
2847
2848
2849
2850
2851
2852
2853
2854
2855
2856
2857
2858
2859
2860
2861
2862
2863
2864
2865
2866
2867
2868
2869
2870
2871
2872
2873
2874
2875
2876
2877
2878
2879
2880
2881
2882
2883
2884
2885
2886
2887
2888
2889
2890
2891
2892
2893
2894
2895
2896
2897
2898
2899
2900
2901
2902
2903
2904
2905
2906
2907
2908
2909
2910
2911
2912
2913
2914
2915
2916
2917
2918
2919
2920
2921
2922
2923
2924
2925
2926
2927
2928
2929
2930
2931
2932
2933
2934
2935
2936
2937
2938
2939
2940
2941
2942
2943
2944
2945
2946
2947
2948
2949
2950
2951
2952
2953
2954
2955
2956
2957
2958
2959
2960
2961
2962
2963
2964
2965
2966
2967
2968
2969
2970
2971
2972
2973
2974
2975
2976
2977
2978
2979
2980
2981
2982
2983
2984
2985
2986
2987
2988
2989
2990
2991
2992
2993
2994
2995
2996
2997
2998
2999
3000
3001
3002
3003
3004
3005
3006
3007
3008
3009
3010
3011
3012
3013
3014
3015
3016
3017
3018
3019
3020
3021
3022
3023
3024
3025
3026
3027
3028
3029
3030
3031
3032
3033
3034
3035
3036
3037
3038
3039
3040
3041
3042
3043
3044
3045
3046
3047
3048
3049
3050
3051
3052
3053
3054
3055
3056
3057
3058
3059
3060
3061
3062
3063
3064
3065
3066
3067
3068
3069
3070
3071
3072
3073
3074
3075
3076
3077
3078
3079
3080
3081
3082
3083
3084
3085
3086
3087
3088
3089
3090
3091
3092
3093
3094
3095
3096
3097
3098
3099
3100
3101
3102
3103
3104
3105
3106
3107
3108
3109
3110
3111
3112
3113
3114
3115
3116
3117
3118
3119
3120
3121
3122
3123
3124
3125
3126
3127
3128
3129
3130
3131
3132
3133
3134
3135
3136
3137
3138
3139
3140
3141
3142
3143
3144
3145
3146
3147
3148
3149
3150
3151
3152
3153
3154
3155
3156
3157
3158
3159
3160
3161
3162
3163
3164
3165
3166
3167
3168
3169
3170
3171
3172
3173
3174
3175
3176
3177
3178
3179
3180
3181
3182
3183
3184
3185
3186
3187
3188
3189
3190
3191
3192
3193
3194
3195
3196
3197
3198
3199
3200
3201
3202
3203
3204
3205
3206
3207
3208
3209
3210
3211
3212
3213
3214
3215
3216
3217
3218
3219
3220
3221
3222
3223
3224
3225
3226
3227
3228
3229
3230
3231
3232
3233
3234
3235
3236
3237
3238
3239
3240
3241
3242
3243
3244
3245
3246
3247
3248
3249
3250
3251
3252
3253
3254
3255
3256
3257
3258
3259
3260
3261
3262
3263
3264
3265
3266
3267
3268
3269
3270
3271
3272
3273
3274
3275
3276
3277
3278
3279
3280
3281
3282
3283
3284
3285
3286
3287
3288
3289
3290
3291
3292
3293
3294
3295
3296
3297
3298
3299
3300
3301
3302
3303
3304
3305
3306
3307
3308
3309
3310
3311
3312
3313
3314
3315
3316
3317
3318
3319
3320
3321
3322
3323
3324
3325
3326
3327
3328
3329
3330
3331
3332
3333
3334
3335
3336
3337
3338
3339
3340
3341
3342
3343
3344
3345
3346
3347
3348
3349
3350
3351
3352
3353
3354
3355
3356
3357
3358
3359
3360
3361
3362
3363
3364
3365
3366
3367
3368
3369
3370
3371
3372
3373
3374
3375
3376
3377
3378
3379
3380
3381
3382
3383
3384
3385
3386
3387
3388
3389
3390
3391
3392
3393
3394
3395
3396
3397
3398
3399
3400
3401
3402
3403
3404
3405
3406
3407
3408
3409
3410
3411
3412
3413
3414
3415
3416
3417
3418
3419
3420
3421
3422
3423
3424
3425
3426
3427
3428
3429
3430
3431
3432
3433
3434
3435
3436
3437
3438
3439
3440
3441
3442
3443
3444
3445
3446
3447
3448
3449
3450
3451
3452
3453
3454
3455
3456
3457
3458
3459
3460
3461
3462
3463
3464
3465
3466
3467
3468
3469
3470
3471
3472
3473
3474
3475
3476
3477
3478
3479
3480
3481
3482
3483
3484
3485
3486
3487
3488
3489
3490
3491
3492
3493
3494
3495
3496
3497
3498
3499
3500
3501
3502
3503
3504
3505
3506
3507
3508
3509
3510
3511
3512
3513
3514
3515
3516
3517
3518
3519
3520
3521
3522
3523
3524
3525
3526
3527
3528
3529
3530
3531
3532
3533
3534
3535
3536
3537
3538
3539
3540
3541
3542
3543
3544
3545
3546
3547
3548
3549
3550
3551
3552
3553
3554
3555
3556
3557
3558
3559
3560
3561
3562
3563
3564
3565
3566
3567
3568
3569
3570
3571
3572
3573
3574
3575
3576
3577
3578
3579
3580
3581
3582
3583
3584
3585
3586
3587
3588
3589
3590
3591
3592
3593
3594
3595
3596
3597
3598
3599
3600
3601
3602
3603
3604
3605
3606
3607
3608
3609
3610
3611
3612
3613
3614
3615
3616
3617
3618
3619
3620
3621
3622
3623
3624
3625
3626
3627
3628
3629
3630
3631
3632
3633
3634
3635
3636
3637
3638
3639
3640
3641
3642
3643
3644
3645
3646
3647
3648
3649
3650
3651
3652
3653
3654
3655
3656
3657
3658
3659
3660
3661
3662
3663
3664
3665
3666
3667
3668
3669
3670
3671
3672
3673
3674
3675
3676
3677
3678
3679
3680
3681
3682
3683
3684
3685
3686
3687
3688
3689
3690
3691
3692
3693
3694
3695
3696
3697
3698
3699
3700
3701
3702
3703
3704
3705
3706
3707
3708
3709
3710
3711
3712
3713
3714
3715
3716
3717
3718
3719
3720
3721
3722
3723
3724
3725
3726
3727
3728
3729
3730
3731
3732
3733
3734
3735
3736
3737
3738
3739
3740
3741
3742
3743
3744
3745
3746
3747
3748
3749
3750
3751
3752
3753
3754
3755
3756
3757
3758
3759
3760
3761
3762
3763
3764
3765
3766
3767
3768
3769
3770
3771
3772
3773
3774
3775
3776
3777
3778
3779
3780
3781
3782
3783
3784
3785
3786
3787
3788
3789
3790
3791
3792
3793
3794
3795
3796
3797
3798
3799
3800
3801
3802
3803
3804
3805
3806
3807
3808
3809
3810
3811
3812
3813
3814
3815
3816
3817
3818
3819
3820
3821
3822
3823
3824
3825
3826
3827
3828
3829
3830
3831
3832
3833
3834
3835
3836
3837
3838
3839
3840
3841
3842
3843
3844
3845
3846
3847
3848
3849
3850
3851
3852
3853
3854
3855
3856
3857
3858
3859
3860
3861
3862
3863
3864
3865
3866
3867
3868
3869
3870
3871
3872
3873
3874
3875
3876
3877
3878
3879
3880
3881
3882
3883
3884
3885
3886
3887
3888
3889
3890
3891
3892
3893
3894
3895
3896
3897
3898
3899
3900
3901
3902
3903
3904
3905
3906
3907
3908
3909
3910
3911
3912
3913
3914
3915
3916
3917
3918
3919
3920
3921
3922
3923
3924
3925
3926
3927
3928
3929
3930
3931
3932
3933
3934
3935
3936
3937
3938
3939
3940
3941
3942
3943
3944
3945
3946
3947
3948
3949
3950
3951
3952
3953
3954
3955
3956
3957
3958
3959
3960
3961
3962
3963
3964
3965
3966
3967
3968
3969
3970
3971
3972
3973
3974
3975
3976
3977
3978
3979
3980
3981
3982
3983
3984
3985
3986
3987
3988
3989
3990
3991
3992
3993
3994
3995
3996
3997
3998
3999
4000
4001
4002
4003
4004
4005
4006
4007
4008
4009
4010
4011
4012
4013
4014
4015
4016
4017
4018
4019
4020
4021
4022
4023
4024
4025
4026
4027
4028
4029
4030
4031
4032
4033
4034
4035
4036
4037
4038
4039
4040
4041
4042
4043
4044
4045
4046
4047
4048
4049
4050
4051
4052
4053
4054
4055
4056
4057
4058
4059
4060
4061
4062
4063
4064
4065
4066
4067
4068
4069
4070
4071
4072
4073
4074
4075
4076
4077
4078
4079
4080
4081
4082
4083
4084
4085
4086
4087
4088
4089
4090
4091
4092
4093
4094
4095
4096
4097
4098
4099
4100
4101
4102
4103
4104
4105
4106
4107
4108
4109
4110
4111
4112
4113
4114
4115
4116
4117
4118
4119
4120
4121
4122
4123
4124
4125
4126
4127
4128
4129
4130
4131
4132
4133
4134
4135
4136
4137
4138
4139
4140
4141
4142
4143
4144
4145
4146
4147
4148
4149
4150
4151
4152
4153
4154
4155
4156
4157
4158
4159
4160
4161
4162
4163
4164
4165
4166
4167
4168
4169
4170
4171
4172
4173
4174
4175
4176
4177
4178
4179
4180
4181
4182
4183
4184
4185
4186
4187
4188
4189
4190
4191
4192
4193
4194
4195
4196
4197
4198
4199
4200
4201
4202
4203
4204
4205
4206
4207
4208
4209
4210
4211
4212
4213
4214
4215
4216
4217
4218
4219
4220
4221
4222
4223
4224
4225
4226
4227
4228
4229
4230
4231
4232
4233
4234
4235
4236
4237
4238
4239
4240
4241
4242
4243
4244
4245
4246
4247
4248
4249
4250
4251
4252
4253
4254
4255
4256
4257
4258
4259
4260
4261
4262
4263
4264
4265
4266
4267
4268
4269
4270
4271
4272
4273
4274
4275
4276
4277
4278
4279
4280
4281
4282
4283
4284
4285
4286
4287
4288
4289
4290
4291
4292
4293
4294
4295
4296
4297
4298
4299
4300
4301
4302
4303
4304
4305
4306
4307
4308
4309
4310
4311
4312
4313
4314
4315
4316
4317
4318
4319
4320
4321
4322
4323
4324
4325
4326
4327
4328
4329
4330
4331
4332
4333
4334
4335
4336
4337
4338
4339
4340
4341
4342
4343
4344
4345
4346
4347
4348
4349
4350
4351
4352
4353
4354
4355
4356
4357
4358
4359
4360
4361
4362
4363
4364
4365
4366
4367
4368
4369
4370
4371
4372
4373
4374
4375
4376
4377
4378
4379
4380
4381
4382
4383
4384
4385
4386
4387
4388
4389
4390
4391
4392
4393
4394
4395
4396
4397
4398
4399
4400
4401
4402
4403
4404
4405
4406
4407
4408
4409
4410
4411
4412
4413
4414
4415
4416
4417
4418
4419
4420
4421
4422
4423
4424
4425
4426
4427
4428
4429
4430
4431
4432
4433
4434
4435
4436
4437
4438
4439
4440
4441
4442
4443
4444
4445
4446
4447
4448
4449
4450
4451
4452
4453
4454
4455
4456
4457
4458
4459
4460
4461
4462
4463
4464
4465
4466
4467
4468
4469
4470
4471
4472
4473
4474
4475
4476
4477
4478
4479
4480
4481
4482
4483
4484
4485
4486
4487
4488
4489
4490
4491
4492
4493
4494
4495
4496
4497
4498
4499
4500
4501
4502
4503
4504
4505
4506
4507
4508
4509
4510
4511
4512
4513
4514
4515
4516
4517
4518
4519
4520
4521
4522
4523
4524
4525
4526
4527
4528
4529
4530
4531
4532
4533
4534
4535
4536
4537
4538
4539
4540
4541
4542
4543
4544
4545
4546
4547
4548
4549
4550
4551
4552
4553
4554
4555
4556
4557
4558
4559
4560
4561
4562
4563
4564
4565
4566
4567
4568
4569
4570
4571
4572
4573
4574
4575
4576
4577
4578
4579
4580
4581
4582
4583
4584
4585
4586
4587
4588
4589
4590
4591
4592
4593
4594
4595
4596
4597
4598
4599
4600
4601
4602
4603
4604
4605
4606
4607
4608
4609
4610
4611
4612
4613
4614
4615
4616
4617
4618
4619
4620
4621
4622
4623
4624
4625
4626
4627
4628
4629
4630
4631
4632
4633
4634
4635
4636
4637
4638
4639
4640
4641
4642
4643
4644
4645
4646
4647
4648
4649
4650
4651
4652
4653
4654
4655
4656
4657
4658
4659
4660
4661
4662
4663
4664
4665
4666
4667
4668
4669
4670
4671
4672
4673
4674
4675
4676
4677
4678
4679
4680
4681
4682
4683
4684
4685
4686
4687
4688
4689
4690
4691
4692
4693
4694
4695
4696
4697
4698
4699
4700
4701
4702
4703
4704
4705
4706
4707
4708
4709
4710
4711
4712
4713
4714
4715
4716
4717
4718
4719
4720
4721
4722
4723
4724
4725
4726
4727
4728
4729
4730
4731
4732
4733
4734
4735
4736
4737
4738
4739
4740
4741
4742
4743
4744
4745
4746
4747
4748
4749
4750
4751
4752
4753
4754
4755
4756
4757
4758
4759
4760
4761
4762
4763
4764
4765
4766
4767
4768
4769
4770
4771
4772
4773
4774
4775
4776
4777
4778
4779
4780
4781
4782
4783
4784
4785
4786
4787
4788
4789
4790
4791
4792
4793
4794
4795
4796
4797
4798
4799
4800
4801
4802
4803
4804
4805
4806
4807
4808
4809
4810
4811
4812
4813
4814
4815
4816
4817
4818
4819
4820
4821
4822
4823
4824
4825
4826
4827
4828
4829
4830
4831
4832
4833
4834
4835
4836
4837
4838
4839
4840
4841
4842
4843
4844
4845
4846
4847
4848
4849
4850
4851
4852
4853
4854
4855
4856
4857
4858
4859
4860
4861
4862
4863
4864
4865
4866
4867
4868
4869
4870
4871
4872
4873
4874
4875
4876
4877
4878
4879
4880
4881
4882
4883
4884
4885
4886
4887
4888
4889
4890
4891
4892
4893
4894
4895
4896
4897
4898
4899
4900
4901
4902
4903
4904
4905
4906
4907
4908
4909
4910
4911
4912
4913
4914
4915
4916
4917
4918
4919
4920
4921
4922
4923
4924
4925
4926
4927
4928
4929
4930
4931
4932
4933
4934
4935
4936
4937
4938
4939
4940
4941
4942
4943
4944
4945
4946
4947
4948
4949
4950
4951
4952
4953
4954
4955
4956
4957
4958
4959
4960
4961
4962
4963
4964
4965
4966
4967
4968
4969
4970
4971
4972
4973
4974
4975
4976
4977
4978
4979
4980
4981
4982
4983
4984
4985
4986
4987
4988
4989
4990
4991
4992
4993
4994
4995
4996
4997
4998
4999
5000
5001
5002
5003
5004
5005
5006
5007
5008
5009
5010
5011
5012
5013
5014
5015
5016
5017
5018
5019
5020
5021
5022
5023
5024
5025
5026
5027
5028
5029
5030
5031
5032
5033
5034
5035
5036
5037
5038
5039
5040
5041
5042
5043
5044
5045
5046
5047
5048
5049
5050
5051
5052
5053
5054
5055
5056
5057
5058
5059
5060
5061
5062
5063
5064
5065
5066
5067
5068
5069
5070
5071
5072
5073
5074
5075
5076
5077
5078
5079
5080
5081
5082
5083
5084
5085
5086
5087
5088
5089
5090
5091
5092
5093
5094
5095
5096
5097
5098
5099
5100
5101
5102
5103
5104
5105
5106
5107
5108
5109
5110
5111
5112
5113
5114
5115
5116
5117
5118
5119
5120
5121
5122
5123
5124
5125
5126
5127
5128
5129
5130
5131
5132
5133
5134
5135
5136
5137
5138
5139
5140
5141
5142
5143
5144
5145
5146
5147
5148
5149
5150
5151
5152
5153
5154
5155
5156
5157
5158
5159
5160
5161
5162
5163
5164
5165
5166
5167
5168
5169
5170
5171
5172
5173
5174
5175
5176
5177
5178
5179
5180
5181
5182
5183
5184
5185
5186
5187
5188
5189
5190
5191
5192
5193
5194
5195
5196
5197
5198
5199
5200
5201
5202
5203
5204
5205
5206
5207
5208
5209
5210
5211
5212
5213
5214
5215
5216
5217
5218
5219
5220
5221
5222
5223
5224
5225
5226
5227
5228
5229
5230
5231
5232
5233
5234
5235
5236
5237
5238
5239
5240
5241
5242
5243
5244
5245
5246
5247
5248
5249
5250
5251
5252
5253
5254
5255
5256
5257
5258
5259
5260
5261
5262
5263
5264
5265
5266
5267
5268
5269
5270
5271
5272
5273
5274
5275
5276
5277
5278
5279
5280
5281
5282
5283
5284
5285
5286
5287
5288
5289
5290
5291
5292
5293
5294
5295
5296
5297
5298
5299
5300
5301
5302
5303
5304
5305
5306
5307
5308
5309
5310
5311
5312
5313
5314
5315
5316
5317
5318
5319
5320
5321
5322
5323
5324
5325
5326
5327
5328
5329
5330
5331
5332
5333
5334
5335
5336
5337
5338
5339
5340
5341
5342
5343
5344
5345
5346
5347
5348
5349
5350
5351
5352
5353
5354
5355
5356
5357
5358
5359
5360
5361
5362
5363
5364
5365
5366
5367
5368
5369
5370
5371
5372
5373
5374
5375
5376
5377
5378
5379
5380
5381
5382
5383
5384
5385
5386
5387
5388
5389
5390
5391
5392
5393
5394
5395
5396
5397
5398
5399
5400
5401
5402
5403
5404
5405
5406
5407
5408
5409
5410
5411
5412
5413
5414
5415
5416
5417
5418
5419
5420
5421
5422
5423
5424
5425
5426
5427
5428
5429
5430
5431
5432
5433
5434
5435
5436
5437
5438
5439
5440
5441
5442
5443
5444
5445
5446
5447
5448
5449
5450
5451
5452
5453
5454
5455
5456
5457
5458
5459
5460
5461
5462
5463
5464
5465
5466
5467
5468
5469
5470
5471
5472
5473
5474
5475
5476
5477
5478
5479
5480
5481
5482
5483
5484
5485
5486
5487
5488
5489
5490
5491
5492
5493
5494
5495
5496
5497
5498
5499
5500
5501
5502
5503
5504
5505
5506
5507
5508
5509
5510
5511
5512
5513
5514
5515
5516
5517
5518
5519
5520
5521
5522
5523
5524
5525
5526
5527
5528
5529
5530
5531
5532
5533
5534
5535
5536
5537
5538
5539
5540
5541
5542
5543
5544
5545
5546
5547
5548
5549
5550
5551
5552
5553
5554
5555
5556
5557
5558
5559
5560
5561
5562
5563
5564
5565
5566
5567
5568
5569
5570
5571
5572
5573
5574
5575
5576
5577
5578
5579
5580
5581
5582
5583
5584
5585
5586
5587
5588
5589
5590
5591
5592
5593
5594
5595
5596
5597
5598
5599
5600
5601
5602
5603
5604
5605
5606
5607
5608
5609
5610
5611
5612
5613
5614
5615
5616
5617
5618
5619
5620
5621
5622
5623
5624
5625
5626
5627
5628
5629
5630
5631
5632
5633
5634
5635
5636
5637
5638
5639
5640
5641
5642
5643
5644
5645
5646
5647
5648
5649
5650
5651
5652
5653
5654
5655
5656
5657
5658
5659
5660
5661
5662
5663
5664
5665
5666
5667
5668
5669
5670
5671
5672
5673
5674
5675
5676
5677
5678
5679
5680
5681
5682
5683
5684
5685
5686
5687
5688
5689
5690
5691
5692
5693
5694
5695
5696
5697
5698
5699
5700
5701
5702
5703
5704
5705
5706
5707
5708
5709
5710
5711
5712
5713
5714
5715
5716
5717
5718
5719
5720
5721
5722
5723
5724
5725
5726
5727
5728
5729
5730
5731
5732
5733
5734
5735
5736
5737
5738
5739
5740
5741
5742
5743
5744
5745
5746
5747
5748
5749
5750
5751
5752
5753
5754
5755
5756
5757
5758
5759
5760
5761
5762
5763
5764
5765
5766
5767
5768
5769
5770
5771
5772
5773
5774
5775
5776
5777
5778
5779
5780
5781
5782
5783
5784
5785
5786
5787
5788
5789
5790
5791
5792
5793
5794
5795
5796
5797
5798
5799
5800
5801
5802
5803
5804
5805
5806
5807
5808
5809
5810
5811
5812
5813
5814
5815
5816
5817
5818
5819
5820
5821
5822
5823
5824
5825
5826
5827
5828
5829
5830
5831
5832
5833
5834
5835
5836
5837
5838
5839
5840
5841
5842
5843
5844
5845
5846
5847
5848
5849
5850
5851
5852
5853
5854
5855
5856
5857
5858
5859
5860
5861
5862
5863
5864
5865
5866
5867
5868
5869
5870
5871
5872
5873
5874
5875
5876
5877
5878
5879
5880
5881
5882
5883
5884
5885
5886
5887
5888
5889
5890
5891
5892
5893
5894
5895
5896
5897
5898
5899
5900
5901
5902
5903
5904
5905
5906
5907
5908
5909
5910
5911
5912
5913
5914
5915
5916
5917
5918
5919
5920
5921
5922
5923
5924
5925
5926
5927
5928
5929
5930
5931
5932
5933
5934
5935
5936
5937
5938
5939
5940
5941
5942
5943
5944
5945
5946
5947
5948
5949
5950
5951
5952
5953
5954
5955
5956
5957
5958
5959
5960
5961
5962
5963
5964
5965
5966
5967
5968
5969
5970
5971
5972
5973
5974
5975
5976
5977
5978
5979
5980
5981
5982
5983
5984
5985
5986
5987
5988
5989
5990
5991
5992
5993
5994
5995
5996
5997
5998
5999
6000
6001
6002
6003
6004
6005
6006
6007
6008
6009
6010
6011
6012
6013
6014
6015
6016
6017
6018
6019
6020
6021
6022
6023
6024
6025
6026
6027
6028
6029
6030
6031
6032
6033
6034
6035
6036
6037
6038
6039
6040
6041
6042
6043
6044
6045
6046
6047
6048
6049
6050
6051
6052
6053
6054
6055
6056
6057
6058
6059
6060
6061
6062
6063
6064
6065
6066
6067
6068
6069
6070
6071
6072
6073
6074
6075
6076
6077
6078
6079
6080
6081
6082
6083
6084
6085
6086
6087
6088
6089
6090
6091
6092
6093
6094
6095
6096
6097
6098
6099
6100
6101
6102
6103
6104
6105
6106
6107
6108
6109
6110
6111
6112
6113
6114
6115
6116
6117
6118
6119
6120
6121
6122
6123
6124
6125
6126
6127
6128
6129
6130
6131
6132
6133
6134
6135
6136
6137
6138
6139
6140
6141
6142
6143
6144
6145
6146
6147
6148
6149
6150
6151
6152
6153
6154
6155
6156
6157
6158
6159
6160
6161
6162
6163
6164
6165
6166
6167
6168
6169
6170
6171
6172
6173
6174
6175
6176
6177
6178
6179
6180
6181
6182
6183
6184
6185
6186
6187
6188
6189
6190
6191
6192
6193
6194
6195
6196
6197
6198
6199
6200
6201
6202
6203
6204
6205
6206
6207
6208
6209
6210
6211
6212
6213
6214
6215
6216
6217
6218
6219
6220
6221
6222
6223
6224
6225
6226
6227
6228
6229
6230
6231
6232
6233
6234
6235
6236
6237
6238
6239
6240
6241
6242
6243
6244
6245
6246
6247
6248
6249
6250
6251
6252
6253
6254
6255
6256
6257
6258
6259
6260
6261
6262
6263
6264
6265
6266
6267
6268
6269
6270
6271
6272
6273
6274
6275
6276
6277
6278
6279
6280
6281
6282
6283
6284
6285
6286
6287
6288
6289
6290
6291
6292
6293
6294
6295
6296
6297
6298
6299
6300
6301
6302
6303
6304
6305
6306
6307
6308
6309
6310
6311
6312
6313
6314
6315
6316
6317
6318
6319
6320
6321
6322
6323
6324
6325
6326
6327
6328
6329
6330
6331
6332
6333
6334
6335
6336
6337
6338
6339
6340
6341
6342
6343
6344
6345
6346
6347
6348
6349
6350
6351
6352
6353
6354
6355
6356
6357
6358
6359
6360
6361
6362
6363
6364
6365
6366
6367
6368
6369
6370
6371
6372
6373
6374
6375
6376
6377
6378
6379
6380
6381
6382
6383
6384
6385
6386
6387
6388
6389
6390
6391
6392
6393
6394
6395
6396
6397
6398
6399
6400
6401
6402
6403
6404
6405
6406
6407
6408
6409
6410
6411
6412
6413
6414
6415
6416
6417
6418
6419
6420
6421
6422
6423
6424
6425
6426
6427
6428
6429
6430
6431
6432
6433
6434
6435
6436
6437
6438
6439
6440
6441
6442
6443
6444
6445
6446
6447
6448
6449
6450
6451
6452
6453
6454
6455
6456
6457
6458
6459
6460
6461
6462
6463
6464
6465
6466
6467
6468
6469
6470
6471
6472
6473
6474
6475
6476
6477
6478
6479
6480
6481
6482
6483
6484
6485
6486
6487
6488
6489
6490
6491
6492
6493
6494
6495
6496
6497
6498
6499
6500
6501
6502
6503
6504
6505
6506
6507
6508
6509
6510
6511
6512
6513
6514
6515
6516
6517
6518
6519
6520
6521
6522
6523
6524
6525
6526
6527
6528
6529
6530
6531
6532
6533
6534
6535
6536
6537
6538
6539
6540
6541
6542
6543
6544
6545
6546
6547
6548
6549
6550
6551
6552
6553
6554
6555
6556
6557
6558
6559
6560
6561
6562
6563
6564
6565
6566
6567
6568
6569
6570
6571
6572
6573
6574
6575
6576
6577
6578
6579
6580
6581
6582
6583
6584
6585
6586
6587
6588
6589
6590
6591
6592
6593
6594
6595
6596
6597
6598
6599
6600
6601
6602
6603
6604
6605
6606
6607
6608
6609
6610
6611
6612
6613
6614
6615
6616
6617
6618
6619
6620
6621
6622
6623
6624
6625
6626
6627
6628
6629
6630
6631
6632
6633
6634
6635
6636
6637
6638
6639
6640
6641
6642
6643
6644
6645
6646
6647
6648
6649
6650
6651
6652
6653
6654
6655
6656
6657
6658
6659
6660
6661
6662
6663
6664
6665
6666
6667
6668
6669
6670
6671
6672
6673
6674
6675
6676
6677
6678
6679
6680
6681
6682
6683
6684
6685
6686
6687
6688
6689
6690
6691
6692
6693
6694
6695
6696
6697
6698
6699
6700
6701
6702
6703
6704
6705
6706
6707
6708
6709
6710
6711
6712
6713
6714
6715
6716
6717
6718
6719
6720
6721
6722
6723
6724
6725
6726
6727
6728
6729
6730
6731
6732
6733
6734
6735
6736
6737
6738
6739
6740
6741
6742
6743
6744
6745
6746
6747
6748
6749
6750
6751
6752
6753
6754
6755
6756
6757
6758
6759
6760
6761
6762
6763
6764
6765
6766
6767
6768
6769
6770
6771
6772
6773
6774
6775
6776
6777
6778
6779
6780
6781
6782
6783
6784
6785
6786
6787
6788
6789
6790
6791
6792
6793
6794
6795
6796
6797
6798
6799
6800
6801
6802
6803
6804
6805
6806
6807
6808
6809
6810
6811
6812
6813
6814
6815
6816
6817
6818
6819
6820
6821
6822
6823
6824
6825
6826
6827
6828
6829
6830
6831
6832
6833
6834
6835
6836
6837
6838
6839
6840
6841
6842
6843
6844
6845
6846
6847
6848
6849
6850
6851
6852
6853
6854
6855
6856
6857
6858
6859
6860
6861
6862
6863
6864
6865
6866
6867
6868
6869
6870
6871
6872
6873
6874
6875
6876
6877
6878
6879
6880
6881
6882
6883
6884
6885
6886
6887
6888
6889
6890
6891
6892
6893
6894
6895
6896
6897
6898
6899
6900
6901
6902
6903
6904
6905
6906
6907
6908
6909
6910
6911
6912
6913
6914
6915
6916
6917
6918
6919
6920
6921
6922
6923
6924
6925
6926
6927
6928
6929
6930
6931
6932
6933
6934
6935
6936
6937
6938
6939
6940
6941
6942
6943
6944
6945
6946
6947
6948
6949
6950
6951
6952
6953
6954
6955
6956
6957
6958
6959
6960
6961
6962
6963
6964
6965
6966
6967
6968
6969
6970
6971
6972
6973
6974
6975
6976
6977
6978
6979
6980
6981
6982
6983
6984
6985
6986
6987
6988
6989
6990
6991
6992
6993
6994
6995
6996
6997
6998
6999
7000
7001
7002
7003
7004
7005
7006
7007
7008
7009
7010
7011
7012
7013
7014
7015
7016
7017
7018
7019
7020
7021
7022
7023
7024
7025
7026
7027
7028
7029
7030
7031
7032
7033
7034
7035
7036
7037
7038
7039
7040
7041
7042
7043
7044
7045
7046
7047
7048
7049
7050
7051
7052
7053
7054
7055
7056
7057
7058
7059
7060
7061
7062
7063
7064
7065
7066
7067
7068
7069
7070
7071
7072
7073
7074
7075
7076
7077
7078
7079
7080
7081
7082
7083
7084
7085
7086
7087
7088
7089
7090
7091
7092
7093
7094
7095
7096
7097
7098
7099
7100
7101
7102
7103
7104
7105
7106
7107
7108
7109
7110
7111
7112
7113
7114
7115
7116
7117
7118
7119
7120
7121
7122
7123
7124
7125
7126
7127
7128
7129
7130
7131
7132
7133
7134
7135
7136
7137
7138
7139
7140
7141
7142
7143
7144
7145
7146
7147
7148
7149
7150
7151
7152
7153
7154
7155
7156
7157
7158
7159
7160
7161
7162
7163
7164
7165
7166
7167
7168
7169
7170
7171
7172
7173
7174
7175
7176
7177
7178
7179
7180
7181
7182
7183
7184
7185
7186
7187
7188
7189
7190
7191
7192
7193
7194
7195
7196
7197
7198
7199
7200
7201
7202
7203
7204
7205
7206
7207
7208
7209
7210
7211
7212
7213
7214
7215
7216
7217
7218
7219
7220
7221
7222
7223
7224
7225
7226
7227
7228
7229
7230
7231
7232
7233
7234
7235
7236
7237
7238
7239
7240
7241
7242
7243
7244
7245
7246
7247
7248
7249
7250
7251
7252
7253
7254
7255
7256
7257
7258
7259
7260
7261
7262
7263
7264
7265
7266
7267
7268
7269
7270
7271
7272
7273
7274
7275
7276
7277
7278
7279
7280
7281
7282
7283
7284
7285
7286
7287
7288
7289
7290
7291
7292
7293
7294
7295
7296
7297
7298
7299
7300
7301
7302
7303
7304
7305
7306
7307
7308
7309
7310
7311
7312
7313
7314
7315
7316
7317
7318
7319
7320
7321
7322
7323
7324
7325
7326
7327
7328
7329
7330
7331
7332
7333
7334
7335
7336
7337
7338
7339
7340
7341
7342
7343
7344
7345
7346
7347
7348
7349
7350
7351
7352
7353
7354
7355
7356
7357
7358
7359
7360
7361
7362
7363
7364
7365
7366
7367
7368
7369
7370
7371
7372
7373
7374
7375
7376
7377
7378
7379
7380
7381
7382
7383
7384
7385
7386
7387
7388
7389
7390
7391
7392
7393
7394
7395
7396
7397
7398
7399
7400
7401
7402
7403
7404
7405
7406
7407
7408
7409
7410
7411
7412
7413
7414
7415
7416
7417
7418
7419
7420
7421
7422
7423
7424
7425
7426
7427
7428
7429
7430
7431
7432
7433
7434
7435
7436
7437
7438
7439
7440
7441
7442
7443
7444
7445
7446
7447
7448
7449
7450
7451
7452
7453
7454
7455
7456
7457
7458
7459
7460
7461
7462
7463
7464
7465
7466
7467
7468
7469
7470
7471
7472
7473
7474
7475
7476
7477
7478
7479
7480
7481
7482
7483
7484
7485
7486
7487
7488
7489
7490
7491
7492
7493
7494
7495
7496
7497
7498
7499
7500
7501
7502
7503
7504
7505
7506
7507
7508
7509
7510
7511
7512
7513
7514
7515
7516
7517
7518
7519
7520
7521
7522
7523
7524
7525
7526
7527
7528
7529
7530
7531
7532
7533
7534
7535
7536
7537
7538
7539
7540
7541
7542
7543
7544
7545
7546
7547
7548
7549
7550
7551
7552
7553
7554
7555
7556
7557
7558
7559
7560
7561
7562
7563
7564
7565
7566
7567
7568
7569
7570
7571
7572
7573
7574
7575
7576
7577
7578
7579
7580
7581
7582
7583
7584
7585
7586
7587
7588
7589
7590
7591
7592
7593
7594
7595
7596
7597
7598
7599
7600
7601
7602
7603
7604
7605
7606
7607
7608
7609
7610
7611
7612
7613
7614
7615
7616
7617
7618
7619
7620
7621
7622
7623
7624
7625
7626
7627
7628
7629
7630
7631
7632
7633
7634
7635
7636
7637
7638
7639
7640
7641
7642
7643
7644
7645
7646
7647
7648
7649
7650
7651
7652
7653
7654
7655
7656
7657
7658
7659
7660
7661
7662
7663
7664
7665
7666
7667
7668
7669
7670
7671
7672
7673
7674
7675
7676
7677
7678
7679
7680
7681
7682
7683
7684
7685
7686
7687
7688
7689
7690
7691
7692
7693
7694
7695
7696
7697
7698
7699
7700
7701
7702
7703
7704
7705
7706
7707
7708
7709
7710
7711
7712
7713
7714
7715
7716
7717
7718
7719
7720
7721
7722
7723
7724
7725
7726
7727
7728
7729
7730
7731
7732
7733
7734
7735
7736
7737
7738
7739
7740
7741
7742
7743
7744
7745
7746
7747
7748
7749
7750
7751
7752
7753
7754
7755
7756
7757
7758
7759
7760
7761
7762
7763
7764
7765
7766
7767
7768
7769
7770
7771
7772
7773
7774
7775
7776
7777
7778
7779
7780
7781
7782
7783
7784
7785
7786
7787
7788
7789
7790
7791
7792
7793
7794
7795
7796
7797
7798
7799
7800
7801
7802
7803
7804
7805
7806
7807
7808
7809
7810
7811
7812
7813
7814
7815
7816
7817
7818
7819
7820
7821
7822
7823
7824
7825
7826
7827
7828
7829
7830
7831
7832
7833
7834
7835
7836
7837
7838
7839
7840
7841
7842
7843
7844
7845
7846
7847
7848
7849
7850
7851
7852
7853
7854
7855
7856
7857
7858
7859
7860
7861
7862
7863
7864
7865
7866
7867
7868
7869
7870
7871
7872
7873
7874
7875
7876
7877
7878
7879
7880
7881
7882
7883
7884
7885
7886
7887
7888
7889
7890
7891
7892
7893
7894
7895
7896
7897
7898
7899
7900
7901
7902
7903
7904
7905
7906
7907
7908
7909
7910
7911
7912
7913
7914
7915
7916
7917
7918
7919
7920
7921
7922
7923
7924
7925
7926
7927
7928
7929
7930
7931
7932
7933
7934
7935
7936
7937
7938
7939
7940
7941
7942
7943
7944
7945
7946
7947
7948
7949
7950
7951
7952
7953
7954
7955
7956
7957
7958
7959
7960
7961
7962
7963
7964
7965
7966
7967
7968
7969
7970
7971
7972
7973
7974
7975
7976
7977
7978
7979
7980
7981
7982
7983
7984
7985
7986
7987
7988
7989
7990
7991
7992
7993
7994
7995
7996
7997
7998
7999
8000
8001
8002
8003
8004
8005
8006
8007
8008
8009
8010
8011
8012
8013
8014
8015
8016
8017
8018
8019
8020
8021
8022
8023
8024
8025
8026
8027
8028
8029
8030
8031
8032
8033
8034
8035
8036
8037
8038
8039
8040
8041
8042
8043
8044
8045
8046
8047
8048
8049
8050
8051
8052
8053
8054
8055
8056
8057
8058
8059
8060
8061
8062
8063
8064
8065
8066
8067
8068
8069
8070
8071
8072
8073
8074
8075
8076
8077
8078
8079
8080
8081
8082
8083
8084
8085
8086
8087
8088
8089
8090
8091
8092
8093
8094
8095
8096
8097
8098
8099
8100
8101
8102
8103
8104
8105
8106
8107
8108
8109
8110
8111
8112
8113
8114
8115
8116
8117
8118
8119
8120
8121
8122
8123
8124
8125
8126
8127
8128
8129
8130
8131
8132
8133
8134
8135
8136
8137
8138
8139
8140
8141
8142
8143
8144
8145
8146
8147
8148
8149
8150
8151
8152
8153
8154
8155
8156
8157
8158
8159
8160
8161
8162
8163
8164
8165
8166
8167
8168
8169
8170
8171
8172
8173
8174
8175
8176
8177
8178
8179
8180
8181
8182
8183
8184
8185
8186
8187
8188
8189
8190
8191
8192
8193
8194
8195
8196
8197
8198
8199
8200
8201
8202
8203
8204
8205
8206
8207
8208
8209
8210
8211
8212
8213
8214
8215
8216
8217
8218
8219
8220
8221
8222
8223
8224
8225
8226
8227
8228
8229
8230
8231
8232
8233
8234
8235
8236
8237
8238
8239
8240
8241
8242
8243
8244
8245
8246
8247
8248
8249
8250
8251
8252
8253
8254
8255
8256
8257
8258
8259
8260
8261
8262
8263
8264
8265
8266
8267
8268
8269
8270
8271
8272
8273
8274
8275
8276
8277
8278
8279
8280
8281
8282
8283
8284
8285
8286
8287
8288
8289
8290
8291
8292
8293
8294
8295
8296
8297
8298
8299
8300
8301
8302
8303
8304
8305
8306
8307
8308
8309
8310
8311
8312
8313
8314
8315
8316
8317
8318
8319
8320
8321
8322
8323
8324
8325
8326
8327
8328
8329
8330
8331
8332
8333
8334
8335
8336
8337
8338
8339
8340
8341
8342
8343
8344
8345
8346
8347
8348
8349
8350
8351
8352
8353
8354
8355
8356
8357
8358
8359
8360
8361
8362
8363
8364
8365
8366
8367
8368
8369
8370
8371
8372
8373
8374
8375
8376
8377
8378
8379
8380
8381
8382
8383
8384
% \iffalse meta-comment balanced on line 122
% revtex4-2.dtx: package to typeset APS, AIP, SOR, ASA, etc. journal articles
% Copyright (c) 2019 American Physical Society.
% https://journals.aps.org/revtex/
% mailto:revtex@aps.org
%
% Disclaimer
%   This file is distributed WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY;
%   without even the implied warranty of
%   MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
% License
%   You may distribute this file under the conditions of the 
%   LaTeX Project Public License 1.3c or later 
%   (http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt).
% ReadMe
%   For the documentation and more detailed instructions for
%   installation, typeset this document with \LaTeX.
% Maintenance Status
%   This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained";
%   Current Maintainer of this work is Arthur Ogawa.
%
% This work consists of the main source file revtex4-2.dtx
% and the derived files
%    revtex4-2.cls, revtex4-2.pdf
% Distribution:
%    CTAN:macros/latex/contrib/revtex/
%
% Unpacking:
%    tex revtex4-2.dtx
%
% Documentation:
%    latex revtex4-2.dtx; ...
%
%    Programm calls to get the documentation (example):
%       pdflatex revtex4-2.dtx
%       makeindex -s gind.ist revtex4-2.idx
%       makeindex -s gglo.ist -o revtex4-2.gls revtex4-2.glo
%       pdflatex revtex4-2.dtx
%       makeindex -s gind.ist revtex4-2.idx
%       pdflatex revtex4-2.dtx
%
% Installation:
%    TDS:bibtex/bst/revtex/
%    TDS:doc/latex/revtex/
%    TDS:tex/latex/revtex/
%    TDS:source/latex/revtex/
%
% Thanks, Heiko!
%    This method of letting a single .dtx file serve as both
%    documentation (via latex) and installer (via tex) follows
%    the example of Heiko Oberdiek. Thanks!
%<*ignore>
\begingroup
  \def\x{LaTeX2e}%
\expandafter\endgroup
\ifcase
 0\expandafter\ifx\csname processbatchFile\endcsname\relax\else1\fi\ifx\fmtname\x\else 1\fi
 \relax
\else
 \csname fi\endcsname
%</ignore>
%<*install>
%% This file will generate documentation and runtime files
%% from revtex4-2.dtx when run through TeX.
\input docstrip
\preamble

This file is part of the APS files in the REVTeX 4 distribution.
For the version number, search on the string %FileInfo

Original version by David Carlisle
Modified by Arthur Ogawa (mailto:arthur_ogawa at sbcglobal dot net)

Version (4.2a, unreleased)
Modified by Aptara on behalf of American Physical Society and American Institute of Physics

Version (4.2b,4.2c)
Modified by Mark Doyle, American Physical Society (mailto:revtex at aps.org)

Version (4.2d--4.2f)
Modified by Phelype Oleinik for the American Physical Society (mailto:phelype.oleinik at latex-project.org)

Copyright (c) 2019--2022 American Physical Society.
https://journals.aps.org/revtex/
mailto:revtex@aps.org

See the REVTeX 4.2 README-REVTEX file for restrictions and more information.

\endpreamble
\askforoverwritefalse
\keepsilent
\generate{%
  \file{revtex4-2.cls}{%
   \from{revtex4-2.dtx}{kernel}%
   \from{ltxutil.dtx}{kernel}%
   \from{ltxfront.dtx}{kernel}%
   \from{ltxgrid.dtx}{kernel}%
   \from{revtex4-2.dtx}{options}%
   \from{ltxutil.dtx}{options}%
   \from{ltxfront.dtx}{options}%
   \from{ltxgrid.dtx}{options}%
   \from{revtex4-2.dtx}{package}%
  }%
  \file{aps4-2.rtx}{\from{revtex4-2.dtx}{aps}}%
  \file{apsrmp4-2.rtx}{\from{revtex4-2.dtx}{rmp}}%
  \file{aps10pt4-2.rtx}{\from{revtex4-2.dtx}{10pt}}%
  \file{aps11pt4-2.rtx}{\from{revtex4-2.dtx}{11pt}}%
  \file{aps12pt4-2.rtx}{\from{revtex4-2.dtx}{12pt}}%
  \file{revsymb4-2.sty}{\from{revtex4-2.dtx}{revsymb}}%
}%
\ifToplevel{
\Msg{***********************************************************}
\Msg{*}
\Msg{* To finish the installation, please move}
\Msg{*    *.cls, *.rtx, and *.sty }
\Msg{* into a directory searched by TeX;}
\Msg{* in a TDS-compliant installation:}
\Msg{* texmf/tex/macros/latex/revtex/.}
\Msg{*}
\Msg{* To produce the documentation,
       run revtex4-2.dtx through LaTeX.}
\Msg{*}
\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
\Msg{***********************************************************}
}
\endbatchfile
%</install>
%<*ignore>
\fi
%</ignore>
% \fi
%
% \GetFileInfo{revtex4-2.dtx}
%
% \StopEventually{}
% \iffalse ltxdoc klootch
%<*package>
%%%  @LaTeX-file{
%%%     filename        = "revtex4-2.dtx",
%%%     version         = "4.2f",
%%%     date            = "2022/06/05",
%%%     author          = "Mark Doyle (mailto: revtex at aps.org), Arthur Ogawa (mailto:arthur_ogawa at sbcglobal.net),
%%%                        commissioned by the American Physical Society.
%%%                        ",
%%%     copyright       = "Copyright (C) 1999, 2009 Arthur Ogawa, Version 4.2 Copyright (C) 2019 American Physical Society
%%%                        distributed under the terms of the 
%%%                        LaTeX Project Public License 1.3c, see
%%%                        ftp://ctan.tug.org/macros/latex/base/lppl.txt
%%%                        ",
%%%     address         = "Mark Doyle,
%%%                        USA",
%%%     telephone       = "",
%%%     FAX             = "",
%%%     email           = "mailto colon revtex at aps.org",
%%%     codetable       = "ISO/ASCII",
%%%     keywords        = "",
%%%     supported       = "yes",
%%%     abstract        = "",
%%%  }
%</package>
% \fi
%
% \iffalse ltxdoc klootch
% The following references the \file{README-REVTEX.tex} file,
% which contains the frontmatter for the programmer's docs.
% The contents of this file are generated when
% you typeset this file with LaTeX.
% Search on "{filecontents*}{README-REVTEX.tex}" to locate it.
% \fi\input{README-REVTEX.tex}%
%
% \subsection{Bill of Materials}
%
% Following is a list of the files in this distribution arranged
% according to provenance.
%
% \subsubsection{Primary Source}%
% One single file generates all.
%\begin{verbatim}
%revtex4-2.dtx
%\end{verbatim}
%
% \subsubsection{Generated by \texttt{tex revtex4-2.dtx}}%
% Typesetting ths file under \TeX\ itself runs the installer, 
% which generates the package files.
%\begin{verbatim}
%revtex4-2.cls, revtex4.ins, revtex4.drv, aps4-2.rtx, 
%aps10pt4-2.rtx, aps11pt4-2.rtx, aps12pt4-2.rtx, revsymp.sty
%\end{verbatim}
%
% \subsubsection{Generated by \texttt{pdflatex revtex4-2.dtx}}%
% Typesetting the source file under \LaTeX\
% generates the documentation.
%\begin{verbatim}
%revtex4.pdf, 
%\end{verbatim}
%
% \subsubsection{Auxiliary}%
% The following are auxiliary files generated
% in the course of running \LaTeX:
% \begin{verbatim}
%revtex4.aux revtex4.idx revtex4.ind revtex4.log revtex4.toc
% \end{verbatim}
%
% \section{Code common to all modules}%
%
% The following may look a bit klootchy, but we
% want to require only one place in this file
% where the version number is stated,
% and we also want to ensure that the version
% number is embedded into every generated file.
%
% Now we declare that
% these files can only be used with \LaTeXe.
% An appropriate message is displayed if
% a different \TeX{} format is used.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*doc|kernel|aps|rmp|revsymb>
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1996/12/01]%
%</doc|kernel|aps|rmp|revsymb>
%<kernel>\ProvidesClass{revtex4-2}
%<aps>\ProvidesFile{aps4-2}
%<rmp>\ProvidesFile{apsrmp4-2}
%<10pt>\ProvidesFile{aps10pt4-2}
%<11pt>\ProvidesFile{aps11pt4-2}
%<12pt>\ProvidesFile{aps12pt4-2}
%<revsymb>\ProvidesPackage{revsymb4-2}
%<*doc>
\ProvidesFile{revtex4-2.dtx}
%</doc>
%<*!package&!options>
%<version>
 [2022/06/05 4.2f (https://journals.aps.org/revtex/ for documentation)]% \fileversion
%</!package&!options>
%    \end{macrocode}
% The current class name is remembered in \cmd\class@name.
% This is something of a klootch, relying as it does on knowledge of the implementation of \cmd\ProvidesPackage.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<kernel>\let\class@name\@gtempa
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \section{The driver module \texttt{driver}}
%
% This module, consisting of the present section,
% typesets the programmer's documentation,
% generating the \file{README-REVTEX.txt} and sample document as needed.
%
% Because the only uncommented-out lines of code at the beginning of
% this file constitute the \file{driver} module itself,
% we can simply typeset the \file{.dtx} file directly,
% and there is thus rarely any need to
% generate the ``driver'' {\sc docstrip} module.
% Module delimiters are nonetheless required so that
% this code does not find its way into the other modules.
%
% The \enve{document} command concludes the typesetting run.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*doc>
%    \end{macrocode}
% The driver uses packages \file{ltxdoc.sty}, \file{ltxdocext.sty}, 
% \file{hyperref.sty}, and whatever font package has been selected.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\documentclass{ltxdoc}
\RequirePackage{ltxdocext}%
\let\url\undefined
\RequirePackage[colorlinks=true,linkcolor=blue]{hyperref}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% We ask for the usual indices and glossaries.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\CodelineIndex\EnableCrossrefs % makeindex -s gind.ist revtex4
\RecordChanges % makeindex -s gglo.ist -o revtex4.gls revtex4.glo
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsubsection{Docstrip and info directives}
%    We use so many {\sc docstrip} modules that we set the
%    \texttt{StandardModuleDepth} counter to 1.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    The following command retrieves the date and version information
%    from this file.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\GetFileInfo\expandafter{\jobname.dtx}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection{The Frontmatter File}
% As promised above, here is the contents of the frontmatter file. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\begin{filecontents*}{README-REVTEX.tex}
\title{%
 The \classname{revtex4-2} document class of the American Physical Society%
 \protect\thanks{Work under hire to American Physical Society. Version \fileversion\ \copyright\ 2019 American Physical Society}%
}%
\author{Arthur Ogawa and Mark Doyle%
 \protect\thanks{First revision of REV\TeX4.0 (unreleased) by David Carlisle, all released versions of 4.0 and 4.1 by Art Ogawa, 4.2a (unreleased) by Aptara, 4.2b,c by Mark Doyle}%
}%
\date{Version \fileversion, dated \filedate}%
\newcommand\revtex{REV\TeX}

\maketitle

This file embodies the implementation of the APS \revtex\ 4.2 document class
for electronic submissions to journals.

The distribution point for this work is
\url{https://journals.aps.org/revtex/},
which contains fully unpacked, prebuilt runtime files and documentation.

\tableofcontents

\section{Using \protect\revtex}

The file \file{README} has retrieval and installation information.

User documentation is presented separately in \file{auguide.tex}.

The file \file{template.aps} is a boilerplate file. 

\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/16}{Initial version}
\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{Move after process options, so \cs{clearpage} not in scope of twocolumn}
\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{Rearrange the ordering so numerical ones come first. AO: David, what does this mean?}
\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{use font-dependent spacing}
\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{4.0d had twoside option setting twoside switch to false}
\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{Move after process options, so the following test works}
\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{print homepage}
\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{protect against hyperref revtex kludges which are not needed now}
\changes{4.0a}{1998/06/10}{multiple preprint commands}
\changes{4.0a}{1998/06/10}{comma not space between email and homepage}
\changes{4.0a}{1998/06/10}{single space footnotes}
\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{First modifications by Arthur Ogawa (mailto:arthur\_ogawa at sbcglobal dot net)}
\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Added localization of \cs{figuresname}}
\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Added localization of \cs{tablesname}}
\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: all code for \protect\classoption{10pt} is in this module.}
\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: all code for \protect\classoption{11pt} is in this module.}
\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: all code for \protect\classoption{12pt} is in this module.}
\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: made aps.rtx part of revtex4.dtx}
\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: remove duplicates}
\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{call \cs{print@floats}}
\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Defer assignment until \cs{AtBeginDocument} time.}
\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Defer decision until \cs{AtBeginDocument} time}
\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Define three separate environments, defer assignment to \cs{AtBeginDocument} time.}
\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Frank Mittelbach, has stated in \protect\classname{multicol}: ``The kernel command \cs{@footnotetext} should not be modified.'' Thus, I have removed David Carlisle's redefinition of that command. Note, however, that later versions of \protect\classname{multicol} do not require this workaround. Belt and suspenders.}%
\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Move this ``complex'' option to the front, where it can be overridden by ``simple'' options.}
\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{New option}
\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{One-line caption sets flush left.}
\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{only execute if appropriate}
\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Processing delayed to \cs{AtBeginDocument} time}
\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Removed invocation of nonexistent class option \protect\classoption{groupauthors} and all other class options that should only be invoked by the document. (Otherwise precedence of class options does not work.)}
\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Restore all media size class option of \protect\file{classes.dtx}}
\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Stack \cs{preprint} args flush right at right margin.}
\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{(AO, 115) If three or more preprints specified, set on single line, with commas.}
\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{(AO, 129) section* within appendix was producing appendixname}
\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{*-form mandates pagebreak}
\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{also spelled ``acknowledgements''.}
\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Do not put by REVTeX in every page foot}
\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{grid changes via ltxgrid procedures}
\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{grid changes with ltxgrid}
\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Insert procedure \cs{checkindate}}
\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Lose compatability mode.}
\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{New ltxgrid-based  code, other bug fixes}
\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{New option ``checkin''}
\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Prevent an inner footnote from performing twice}
\changes{4.0d}{2000/04/10}{Also alter how lists get indented.}
\changes{4.0d}{2000/04/10}{eprint takes an optional argument, syntactical only in this case.}
\changes{4.0d}{2000/04/10}{New option}
\changes{4.0d}{2000/05/10}{More features and bug fixes: compatability with longtable and array packages. Now certainly incompatible with multicol.}
\changes{4.0d}{2000/05/17}{make longtable trigger the head, too}
\changes{4.0d}{2000/05/18}{But alternative spelling is deprecated.}
\changes{4.0e}{2000/09/20}{New option showkeys}
\changes{4.0e}{2000/11/14}{Bug fixes and minor new features: title block affiliations can have ancillary data, just like authors; clearpage processing revamped, with floats staying in order; widetext ornaments.}
\changes{4.0e}{2000/11/21}{adornments above and below.}
\changes{4.0f}{2001/02/13}{Last bug fixes before release.}
\changes{4.0rc1}{2001/06/17}{Running headers always as if two-sided}
\changes{4.0rc1}{2001/06/18}{grid changes with push and pop}
\changes{4.0rc1}{2001/06/18}{grid changes with push and pop}
\changes{4.0rc4}{2001/07/23}{hyperref is no longer loaded via class option: use a usepackage statement instead}
\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 457) Endnotes to be sorted in with numerical citations.}%
\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 451) ``Cannot have more than 256 cites in a document''}%
\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 457) Endnotes to be sorted in with numerical citations.}%
\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 460) ``Proper style is "FIG. 1. ..." (no colon)''}%
\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 478) \cs{ds@letterpaper}, so that ``letterpaper really is the default''}%
\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 488) Change processing of options to allow an unused option to specify society and journal}%
\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/19}{(AO, 461) Change the csname revtex uses from @dotsep to ltxu@dotsep. The former is understood in mu. (What we wanted was a dimension.)}%
\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/19}{For natbib versions before 8.21, \cs{NAT@sort} was consulted only as natbib was being read in. Now it is fully dynamic.}
\changes{4.1b}{2008/05/29}{The csname substyle@ext is now defined without a dot (.), to be compatible with \LaTeX usage (see @clsextension and @pkgextension).}
\changes{4.1b}{2008/06/01}{(AO) Implement bibnotes through \cs{frontmatter@footnote@produce} instead of \cs{bibnotes@sw}}%
\changes{4.1b}{2008/06/01}{Add option reprint, opposite of preprint, and preferred alternative to twocolumn}
\changes{4.1b}{2008/06/29}{(AO, 455) Be nice to a list within the abstract (assign \cs{@totalleftmargin}).}
\changes{4.1b}{2008/06/30}{(AO) Structure the Abstract using the \texttt{bibliography} environment}
\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) coordinate \cs{if@twoside} with \cs{twoside@sw}}
\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) No longer need to test \cs{chapter} as of \texttt{natbib} version 8.2}
\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) No longer use \cs{secnumarabic@sw}, instead use \cs{setup@secnums}}
\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) Provide more diagnostics when \cs{@society} is assigned.}
\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) provide option longbibliography}
\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Add \cs{@hangfroms@section}}
\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Break out \cs{@caption@fignum@sep}}
\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Class option galley sets \cs{preprintsty@sw} to false}
\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Code relating to new syntax for frontmatter has been placed in \file{ltxfront.dtx}}
\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Package textcase is now simply a required package}
\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Procedures \cs{@parse@class@options@society} and \cs{@parse@class@options@journal} and friends}
\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Read in all required packages together}
\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Remove options newabstract and oldabstract}
\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/01}{Section numbering via procedures \cs{secnums@rtx} and \cs{secnums@arabic}.}
\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{As with author formatting, rag the right more, and assign \cs{@totalleftmargin}. Also neutralize \cs{def@after@address}.}%
\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Rag the right even more: .8\cs{hsize}. Also, assign \cs{@totalleftmargin}.}%
\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{The \texttt{rmp} journal substyle selects \texttt{groupedaddress} by default.}%
\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Use \cs{setup@hook} to initialize all.}
\changes{4.1c}{2008/08/15}{Document class option longbibliography via \cs{substyle@post}}
\changes{4.1d}{2009/03/27}{Definition of \cs{	@fnsymbol} follows fixltx2e.sty}
\changes{4.1e}{2008/06/29}{(AO, 455) be nice to a list within the abstract}
\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/07}{(AO, 513) Add class option linenumbers: number the lines a la \classname{lineno}}
\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/07}{(AO, 516) Merged references are separated with a semicolon}
\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/10}{(AO, 520) Automatically produce \cs{bibliography} command when needed}%
\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/11}{(AO, 521) Lonely bibliography head}%
\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/11}{(AO, 522) Warn if software is expired}%
\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/15}{(AO, 523) Add class option nomerge, to turn off new natbib 8.3 syntax}
\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/20}{(AO, 524) Makes no sense if citations are superscript numbers and so are footnotes}
\changes{4.1f}{2009/10/05}{(AO, 530) \cs{@fnsymbol}: Failed to import fixltx2e.sty technology. Return to LaTeX core.}
\changes{4.1g}{2009/10/07}{(AO, 525) Remove phantom paragraph above display math that is given in vertical mode}%
\changes{4.1g}{2009/10/07}{(AO, 538) \cs{MakeTextUppercase} inappropriately expands the double backslash}
\changes{4.1h}{2009/10/09}{(AO) Remove expiry code in the release software}%
\changes{4.1i}{2009/10/23}{(AO, 541) Defer assignment of \cs{cite} until after natbib loads}
\changes{4.1j}{2009/10/24}{(AO, 549) Repairing natbib's \cs{BibitemShut} and \cs{bibAnnote}}
\changes{4.1j}{2009/10/25}{(AO, 545) hypertext capabilities off by default; enable with \classoption{hypertext}}
\changes{4.1j}{2009/10/25}{(AO, 552) Repair spacing in \cs{onlinecite}}
\changes{4.1k}{2009/11/06}{(AO, 554) give the \cs{newlabel} command syntax appropriate to the hyperref package}
\changes{4.1n}{2009/11/06}{(AO, 565) restore 4.0 behavior: invoking class option preprint implies class option preprintnumbers}
\changes{4.1n}{2009/11/30}{(AO, 566) restore 4.0 behavior: flush column bottoms}
\changes{4.1n}{2009/12/05}{(AO, 569) Use of \classname{hyperref} interferes with column balancing of last page}%
\changes{4.1n}{2009/12/09}{(AO, 569) execute the after-last-shipout procedures from within the safety of the output routine}%
\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) Interface \cs{set@footnotewidth} for determining the set width of footnotes}%
\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 572) Independent footnote counter for title block. Abstract footnote counter shared with body.}%
\changes{4.1n}{2009/12/13}{(AO, 573) arrange to load \classname{lineno} after any other packages.}%
\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/04}{(AO, 575) the default for journal prstper is longbibliography}%
\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/04}{(AO, 576) In .bst files, remove support for the annote field}%
\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO) fine-tune spacing above and below widetext}%
\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) class file must set \cs{splittopskip}; fine tune \cs{skip}\cs{footins}; \cs{footnoterule} defined in terms of \cs{skip}\cs{footins}}%
\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 572) \cs{@makefntext} and \cs{frontmatter@makefntext} must be defined harmoniously}%
\changes{4.1o}{2010/02/02}{(AO, 575) Automatically incorporate the (Bib\TeX-generated) .bbl into an explicit \env{thebibliography}}%
\changes{4.1o}{2010/02/05}{(AO, 549) Remove patch to natbib, which is now at version 8.31a}
\changes{4.1o}{2010/02/07}{(AO, 578) accommodate the possible space character preceding \cs{BibitemShut}.} 
\changes{4.1o}{2010/02/05}{(AO, 579) Endnote shall comprise their own Bib\TeX\ entry type: @FOOTNOTE.} 
\changes{4.1o}{2010/02/10}{(AO, 580) Provide a document class option to turn off production of eprint field in bibliography.} 
\changes{4.1o}{2010/02/12}{(AO, 580) Control .bst at run time.}%
\changes{4.1o}{2010/02/09}{(AO, 581) Handle case: merged references, with first ending in a stop character.} 
\changes{4.1p}{2010/02/24}{(AO, 583) Provide interface to \classname{ltxgrid} \cs{onecolumn@grid@setup} and \cs{twocolumn@grid@setup}} 
\changes{4.1p}{2010/02/24}{(AO, 584) Per MD, remove trailing space character from each journal abbreviation: it had caused an extraneous space in the .bbl} 
\changes{4.1q}{2010/04/01}{(AO, 586) When .bbl is pasted into the document, prevent automatic bibliography inclusion.}%
\changes{4.1q}{2010/04/13}{(AO, 588) Only write \revtex-specific BibTeX .bib data if the .bst style is set by REVTeX.}%
\changes{4.1r}{2010/06/22}{(AO, 595) Provide \cs{lovname} along with other List of Videos definitions.}%
\changes{4.2a}{2014/12/31}{(Aptara, MD) Added initial support for SOR and AAPM journals, additional journals for APS, and additional journals and proceedings for AIP, unreleased.}%
\changes{4.2a}{2014/12/31}{(Aptara) Make prb style to follow other Phys. Rev. journals.}%
\changes{4.2a}{2014/12/31}{(Aptara) Corrected indentation for tableofcontents appearing along with listoffigure/listoftable.}%
\changes{4.2a}{2017/11/21}{(MD) Make long bibliography style the default now.}%
\changes{4.2a}{2017/11/28}{(MD) Add call to normalsize to be a good citizen and allow booktabs.sty to work properly}.%
\changes{4.2b}{2018/12/26}{(MD) Make titles in bibliography default, prb style to follow other Phys. Rev. journals, add a unified physrev option as well as prx and prapplied options. Corrected indentation for tableofcontents appearing along with listoffigure/listoftable.}%
\changes{4.2b}{2017/11/21}{(MD) Update options for new titles without "Special Topics" and make prper match style of other journal options}%
\changes{4.2b}{2017/11/21}{(MD) Add options for new APS journals and a generic physrev option for future-proofing}%
\changes{4.2b}{2017/11/22}{(MD) Change default to not use a title page - it seems antiquated}%
\changes{4.2b}{2017/11/22}{(MD) MD - not sure why these parameters were different previously. Made them match except for title.}%
\changes{4.2b}{2017/11/22}{(MD) PACS are obsolete altogether now}%
\changes{4.2b}{2018/12/26}{(MD) Improve control over display of e-print ids in bibliography.}%

\end{filecontents*}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection{The Document Body}
%
% Here is the document body, containing only a
% \cmd\DocInput\ directive---referring to this very file.
% This very cute self-reference is a common \classname{ltxdoc} idiom.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%%\newcommand\revtex{REV\TeX}% TeXSupport
\begin{document}%
\expandafter\DocInput\expandafter{\jobname.dtx}%
\PrintChanges
\end{document}
%    \end{macrocode}
% And that is the end of the driver for the programmer's documentation.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</doc>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \section{Overview}%
% \revtex\ is a \LaTeXe\ document class, somewhat like a hybrid of 
% the standard \LaTeX\ \classname{book} and \classname{article} classes.
%
% Certain packages are (should be) loaded by this class in any case:
% \classname{amssymb}, \classname{amsmath}, \classname{bm}, \classname{natbib}.
% 
% Certain packages are automatically loaded by this class
% when a corresponding class option has been invoked:
% 
% \begin{tabular}{ll}
% \textbf{\revtex\ option}&\textbf{package}\\
% \classoption{amsfonts}&\classname{amsfonts}\\
% \classoption{amssymb}&\classname{amssymb}\\
% \classoption{aps}&\classname{overcite}\\
% \end{tabular}
%
% Certain other packages are to be loaded by the
% document through explicit use of \cmd\usepackage.
% Some mentioned in the user documentation are
% \classname{graphicx}, \classname{longtable}, \classname{hyperref}, 
% and \classname{bm}.
%
% Certain commonly used packages are known to be incompatible with
% \revtex, among them \classname{multicol} and \classname{cite}.
% If such a package is found to be loaded, \revtex\ issues an error message
% and halts the job.
% Halting might be considered severe punishment for loading an incompatible 
% package, but if we were to proceed, an even weirder error might be encountered
% further down the road.
%
% This document class implements the substyle: a set of mutually
% exclusive class options that, in this case, allow the 
% document class to address multiple societies.
% It also implements a sub-substyle, giving the 
% journal of the given society.
% Any society may create a substyle;
% this file generates one for \classoption{aps}.
%
% FIXME: should always load the \classname{graphicx} package. No, allow user to load whichever graphics package is desired.
% 
% QUERY: since \classname{amsfonts} and \classname{amssymb} extend
% syntax, why not load them in any case?
% 
% Certain processing occurs at the endgame for reading in \revtex, thereby establishing
% precedence for assignments to \LaTeX's (and \revtex's) parameters:
% \begin{enumerate}
% \item
%  Figure out which society is operative and read in the indicated \file{.rtx} file.
% \item
%  Figure out which journal option is operative and execute the indicated journal command. This may lead to reading in a journal substyle \file{.rtx} file.
% \item
%  Figure out which pointsize is operative and execute the indicateded pointsize command. This may lead to reading in a pointsize  \file{.rtx} file.
% \item
%  Execute all of the document's options, in the order declared within the document.
% \item
%  Read in all required packages (like \classname{natbib}, \classname{amsfonts}, \classname{amssymb}), that were determined by class, society, and journal.
% \item
%  The last required package, if existing, is the document's style file, the \file{.rty} file. 
%  Note that the \file{.rty} file can override the assignments of \revtex, society, journal, and required packages, and even load its own packages.
%  It can also, via appendations to \cmd\setup@hook, override the setup code itself.
% \item
%  Execute all of the setup code accumulated. Such code can be queued by \revtex\ itself, by the society, by the journal, or by the pointsize. 
% \item
%  At this point, \revtex\ has completed the process of inputting itself, 
%  and \LaTeX\ will now execute the \cmd\AtEndOfClass\ procedures.
% \end{enumerate}
%
% \revtex\ will have enqueued code to execute at \cmd\AtBeginDocument\ time,
% in two different queues. 
% \cmd\document@inithook\ executes immediately upon encountering the \cmd\begin\env{document} statement, 
% \cmd\class@documenthook\ at the end of all the code enqueued via \cmd\AtBeginDocument. 
% \begin{enumerate}
% \item
%  Install procedures to execute at the very end of the class's
%  \cmd\AtBeginDocument\ processing, such as
%  \begin{enumerate}
%  \item
%   closing out the page grid
%  \item
%   putting out the LastPage label.
%  \item
%   issuing a \cmd\bibliographystyle\ command, based on the value set
%   by the society substyle.
%  \item
%   setting default values for parameters used in the document.
%FIXME: differentiate between class's parameters that can wait until
% they are used in the document, and parameters that are used at \cmd\AtBeginDocument\ time.
%  \end{enumerate}
% \item
%  Install procedures to execute the very last at \cmd\AtEndDocument\ time,
%  such as the \cmd\clearpage\ processing.
% \end{enumerate}
%
% Certain events are optionally scheduled for \cmd\AtBeginDocument\ time:
% \begin{enumerate}
% \item
%  Setting default values for the Booleans and for other procedures used in formatting.
% \item
%  In response to class options options, adjusting parameters and procedures used in formatting.
% \item
%  Implementing the \classoption{eqsecnum} option, if required.
% \item
%  Setting the state engine for data commands.
% \item
%  Memorizing procedures for later use.
% \item
%  Setting type size and area, for use by later calculations.
% \end{enumerate}
%
% Certain events are scheduled for \cmd\class@enddocumenthook\ time:
% \begin{enumerate}
% \item
%  Print out the migrated floats or the end notes, if needed.
% \item
%  Close out the page grid.
% \item
%  Label the last page of the document
% \item
%  (\classname{natbib}) prepare to read in the \file{.aux} file.
% \end{enumerate}
%
% \section{Writing journal-specifc extensions to \revtex}
%
% With this version of \revtex, we introduce a somewhat different
% scheme for adapting \revtex\ to the needs of a specific journal.
%
% To create a journal substyle, you create new class options in 
% \revtex\ for the society, say \classoption{osa}, and any of that society's journals,
% one of which is, say, \classoption{josaa},
% using the code for the APS as a guide.
% In particular, each of your new options should separately define \cmd\@society\
% and \cmd\@journal. That for the former will be the same for
% all options relating to a particular society.
%
% Then, for the society, you create a corresponding \file{.rtx}
% file, in our case \file{osa.rtx}.
% Within that file, you override procedures and parameter assignments as you see fit.
% Ideally they will be generally applicable to all of that society's
% journals (see the file \file{aps.rtx} for a realization of this scheme).
% Also within that file, you include a 
% section of code for each journal, that for josaa looks like:
% \begin{verbatim}
% \@ifx{\@journal\journal@josaa}{%
% <code specific to the josaa>
% }{}%
% \end{verbatim}
% 
% Thus far, the scheme is similar to that used in \revtex\ 3.1.
% However, the new scheme does differ from the old in that 
% the \file{.rtx} file should define no syntactical extensions
% to \revtex.
%
% \section{The \classname{revtex4} Document Class}
% Above, we took
% advantage of 1) the \LaTeX\ definition of \cmd\ProvidesPackage\ and
% 2) that the line of code immediately afterwards follows the \cmd\ProvidesClass\ statement above. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*kernel>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% Print a banner in the log:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\GenericInfo{}{\space
 Copyright (c) 2019 American Physical Society.^^J
 mailto:revtex@aps.org^^J
 Licensed under the LPPL:^^Jhttp://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/base/lppl.txt^^J
 Arthur Ogawa <arthur_ogawa at sbcglobal dot net>^^J
 Based on work by David Carlisle <david at dcarlisle.demon.co.uk>^^J
 Version (4.2d--4.2f): Modified by Mark Doyle and Phelype Oleinik^^J
 \@gobble
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection{Compatibility Processing}
%
% If the document has \cmd\documentstyle|{revtex4}|,
% then, instead of attempting to run in compatability mode,
% just complain and exit.
% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Lose compatability mode.}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\if@compatibility    
  \edef\reserved@a{\errhelp{%
   Change your \string\documentstyle\space statement to
   \string\documentclass\space and rerun.
  }}\reserved@a
  \errmessage{You cannot run \class@name\space in compatability mode}%
  \expandafter\@@end
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%
% \section{Extensions to the \LaTeX\ Kernel}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</kernel>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% Here, we incorporate the utility, frontmatter, and page grid packages.
% The \classname{ltxutil}, \classname{ltxfront}, and \classname{ltxgrid} source are distributed with 
% \revtex.
%
% Here begins the \file{options} \textsc{docstrip} module.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*options>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection{Hooks}
%
% \begin{macro}{\setup@hook}
% The procedure 
% \cmd\setup@hook\
% serves as the vehicle for all code that 
% gives values to the class's parameters once all the 
% society, journal, options, and packages have been processed. 
%
% Arrange for journal substyles to set their own default values.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\setup@hook\@empty
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% After preamble processing is complete,
% detect whether package \classname{longtable} has been loaded and patch it.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\appdef\document@inithook{%
 \switch@longtable
 \let\LT@makecaption\LT@makecaption@rtx
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\LT@makecaption}
% We override the caption processing method of the \classname{longtable} package:
% space below the caption is created via strut instead of whitespace.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\LT@makecaption@rtx#1#2#3{%
  \LT@mcol\LT@cols c{%
    \hbox to\z@{%
     \hss
     \parbox[t]\LTcapwidth{%
      \sbox\@tempboxa{#1{#2: }#3\unskip\nobreak\vrule\@width\z@\@height\z@\@depth .5\baselineskip}%
      \ifdim\wd\@tempboxa>\hsize
        #1{#2: }#3\unskip\nobreak\vrule\@width\z@\@height\z@\@depth .5\baselineskip
      \else
        \hbox to\hsize{\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}%
      \fi
      \endgraf
     }%
     \hss
    }%
  }%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\robust@boldmath}
% Robustify the \cmd\boldmath command. 
% If Team \LaTeX\ (or any package) ever gets around to fixing this problem, 
% we will bow out. (This fix relates to bug \#394.)
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\protectdef@boldmath{%
 \expandafter\@ifnotrelax\csname boldmath \endcsname{}{%
  \class@info{Robustifying \string\LaTeX's \string\boldmath\space command}%
  \expandafter\let\csname boldmath \endcsname\boldmath
  \expandafter\def\expandafter\boldmath\expandafter{\expandafter\protect\csname boldmath \endcsname}%
 }%
}%
\appdef\document@inithook{%
 \protectdef@boldmath
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \section{Compatability with the geometry package}
%
% The \classname{geometry} package of Hideo Umeki provides a way to 
% specify the metrics of the media and page layout.
% We want to ensure that \revtex\ does not foreclose on the use of 
% this or any other such package, nor to interfere with
% explicit assignments of such metric parameters within the 
% document preamble.
% 
% The \LaTeX\ parameters (resp. \TeX\ primitives) set by \classname{geometry} are:
% \cmd\paperwidth, \cmd\paperheight, 
% \cmd\textwidth, \cmd\textheight, 
% \cmd\topmargin, \cmd\headheight, \cmd\headsep, 
% \cmd\footskip, \cmd\skip\cmd\footins, 
% \cmd\marginparwidth, \cmd\marginparsep, 
% \cmd\oddsidemargin, \cmd\evensidemargin, 
% \cmd\columnsep, 
% \cmd\hoffset, \cmd\voffset, \cmd\mag, 
% \cmd\if@twocolumn, \cmd\if@twoside, \cmd\if@mparswitch, \cmd\if@reversemargin, 
%
% \revtex's assignments can be overridden by 
% any package or other statement in the document preamble, 
% so it should be compatible. 
%
%FIXME: one parameter is rendered semantically void (by \file{ltxgrid.dtx}): 
% \cmd\if@twocolumn. 
%
% \section{Options}\label{sec:options}%
%
% \subsection{Define Booleans Used in Options}%
% The following Booleans are used within the document class to
% allow the document or the substyle to make selections
% of formatting.
% An explicit document class option overrides an assignment made by a substyle.
%
% \subsection{Declare Options}%
%
% \subsubsection{Checkin: for Editorial Use}%
% A document class option declaring that the document is being processed by the 
% editorial staff.
%
% This option should:
% \begin{itemize}
% \item
% put date in footer along with folio
% \item
% Have the effect of selecting the \classoption{preprint} class option.
% \item
% Have the effect of selecting the \classoption{showpacs} class option.
% \item
% specify that when a float is placed h or H, it will be allowed to break over pages.
% (Note: be sure that if the enclosed \env{tabular} has an optional argument, you change it to [v], or remove it entirely.)
% \end{itemize}
% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{New option ``checkin''}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{checkin}{%
  \@booleantrue\dateinRH@sw
  \@booleantrue\preprintsty@sw
  \def\@pointsize{12}%
  \@booleantrue\showPACS@sw
  \@booleantrue\showKEYS@sw
  \def\fp@proc@h{\allow@breaking@tables}%
  \def\fp@proc@H{\allow@breaking@tables}%
}%
\@booleanfalse\dateinRH@sw
\def\checkindate{\dateinRH@sw{{\tiny(\today)}}{}}%
\def\allow@breaking@tables{%
 \def\array@default{v}% tabular can break over pages
 \@booleanfalse\floats@sw % table can break over pages
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsubsection{Preprint Style}%
%
% \begin{macro}{\preprintsty@sw}
% The boolean \cmd\preprintsty@sw\ signifies that 
% the document is to be formatted in preprint style.
% \changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{Rearrange the ordering so numerical ones come first. AO: David, what does this mean?}
% \changes{4.0a}{1998/06/10}{comma not space between email and homepage}
% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Move this ``complex'' option to the front, where it can be overridden by ``simple'' options.}
% \changes{4.1b}{2008/06/01}{Add option reprint, opposite of preprint, and preferred alternative to twocolumn}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{preprint}{%
 \@booleantrue\preprintsty@sw
 \ExecuteOptions{12pt}%
}%
\DeclareOption{reprint}{%
\@booleanfalse\preprintsty@sw
\@booleantrue\twocolumn@sw
 \ExecuteOptions{10pt}%
}%
\DeclareOption{manuscript}{%
 \class@warn{Document class option manuscript is obsolete; use preprint instead}%
 \ExecuteOptions{preprint}%
}%
\@booleanfalse\preprintsty@sw
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\showPACS@sw}
% \begin{macro}{\showKEYS@sw}
% If \cmd\showPACS@sw\ is true, print the PACS information in the title block,
% otherwise not.
% Similarly for \cmd\showKEYS@sw\ and the keywords.
% \subsubsection{Showing PACS and keywords}%
% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{New option}
% \changes{4.0e}{2000/09/20}{New option showkeys}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{showpacs}{%
  \@booleantrue\showPACS@sw
}%
\DeclareOption{noshowpacs}{%
  \@booleanfalse\showPACS@sw
}%
\DeclareOption{showkeys}{%
  \@booleantrue\showKEYS@sw
}%
\DeclareOption{noshowkeys}{%
  \@booleanfalse\showKEYS@sw
}%
\@booleanfalse\showPACS@sw
\@booleanfalse\showKEYS@sw
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsubsection{Balance the last page when in two-column page grid}%
%
% \begin{macro}{\balancelastpage@sw}
% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
% If we are in a two-column page grid, we may wish to balance the columns
% of the last page. This will be done automatically if the 
% \classoption{twocolumn} document class option is chosen.
% This action will be turned off by the \classoption{nobalancelastpage}.
% A complementary class option, \classoption{balancelastpage} is also provided.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{balancelastpage}{%
  \@booleantrue\balancelastpage@sw
}%
\DeclareOption{nobalancelastpage}{%
  \@booleanfalse\balancelastpage@sw
}%
\@booleantrue\balancelastpage@sw
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsubsection{Showing preprint numbers}%
%
% \begin{macro}{\preprint@sw}
% \changes{4.0d}{2000/04/10}{New option}
% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
% \changes{4.1n}{2009/11/06}{(AO, 565) restore 4.0 behavior: default value of \cs{preprint@sw} follows \cs{preprintsty@sw}}
% The boolean \cmd\preprint@sw\ signifies that 
% the preprints (cf. \cmd\preprint) are to be formatted (usually on the title page).
% The option \classoption{preprintnumbers} declares to do so,
% \classoption{nopreprintnumbers} declares not to; 
% the default is to follow \cmd\preprintsty@sw. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{nopreprintnumbers}{\@booleanfalse\preprint@sw}%
\DeclareOption{preprintnumbers}{\@booleantrue\preprint@sw}%
\appdef\setup@hook{%
 \@ifxundefined\preprint@sw{\let\preprint@sw\preprintsty@sw}{}%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsubsection{Hypertext Option}%
%
% \changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{protect against hyperref revtex kludges which are not needed now}
% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Move this ``complex'' option to the front, where it can be overridden by ``simple'' options.}
% \changes{4.0rc4}{2001/07/23}{hyperref is no longer loaded via class option: use a usepackage statement instead}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{hyperref}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% The following code had been commented out, it is now truly a comment:
%    \begin{verbatim}
%\AtEndOfClass{%
% \begingroup
%  \edef\@tempa{%
%   \let
%   \noexpand\@clsextension
%   \noexpand\@empty
%   \noexpand\RequirePackage{hyperref}%
%   \def\noexpand
%   \@clsextension{\@clsextension}%
%  }%
%  \expandafter
% \endgroup
% \@tempa
%}%
% \def\@pointsize{10}%
%    \end{verbatim}
%
% If you have a hyper-foo enabled browser you may prefer this format
% which does not print the URL for the home page, but just makes the
% name a link, but by default print it so it works on paper.
% \changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{print homepage}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
 \class@warn{Class option "hyperref" is no longer supported.^^JEmploy \string\usepackage{hyperref} instead}%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsubsection{Type Size}%
% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
% Use \cmd\@pointsize|=10| rather than \cmd\@ptsize|=0| to allow easy extensions
% to 9pt or whatever. 
% Note: the three alternatives are mutually exclusive. 
%
% At this point, the parameter \cmd\@pointsize\ is set to \cmd\undefined:
% a society \emph{must} give it a definition.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{10pt}{\def\@pointsize{10}}%
\DeclareOption{11pt}{\def\@pointsize{11}}%
\DeclareOption{12pt}{\def\@pointsize{12}}%
\let\@pointsize\@undefined
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsubsection{Media Size}%
%
% \begin{macro}{\paperheight}
% \begin{macro}{\paperwidth}
% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Restore all media size class option of \protect\file{classes.dtx}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{a4paper}{%
    \setlength\paperheight {297mm}%
    \setlength\paperwidth  {210mm}%
}%
\DeclareOption{a5paper}{%
    \setlength\paperheight {210mm}%
    \setlength\paperwidth  {148mm}%
}%
\DeclareOption{b5paper}{%
    \setlength\paperheight {250mm}%
    \setlength\paperwidth  {176mm}%
}%
\DeclareOption{letterpaper}{%
    \setlength\paperheight {11in}%
    \setlength\paperwidth  {8.5in}%
}%
\DeclareOption{legalpaper}{%
    \setlength\paperheight {14in}%
    \setlength\paperwidth  {8.5in}%
}%
\DeclareOption{executivepaper}{%
    \setlength\paperheight {10.5in}%
    \setlength\paperwidth  {7.25in}%
}%
\DeclareOption{landscape}{%
    \setlength\@tempdima   {\paperheight}%
    \setlength\paperheight {\paperwidth}%
    \setlength\paperwidth  {\@tempdima}%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 478) \cs{ds@letterpaper}, so that ``letterpaper really is the default''}%
% Effectively select \classoption{letterpaper}. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ds@letterpaper
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsubsection{Bibnotes}%
%
% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@footnote@produce}
% Frontmatter footnotes result from frontmatter commands like
% \cmd\email, \cmd\homepage, \cmd\altaffiliation, and \cmd\thanks.
% The default for \cmd\frontmatter@footnote@produce\ is
% \cmd\frontmatter@footnote@produce@footnote, which formats the frontmatter footnotes
% at the foot of the title page. The \classoption{bibnotes} class option
% defers them to the bibliography.
% \changes{4.1b}{2008/06/01}{(AO) Implement bibnotes through \cs{frontmatter@footnote@produce} instead of \cs{bibnotes@sw}}%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{bibnotes}{\let\frontmatter@footnote@produce\frontmatter@footnote@produce@endnote}%
\DeclareOption{nobibnotes}{\let\frontmatter@footnote@produce\frontmatter@footnote@produce@footnote}%
\let\frontmatter@footnote@produce\frontmatter@footnote@produce@footnote
\appdef\class@enddocumenthook{\auto@bib}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsubsection{Footinbib}%
%
% \begin{macro}{\footinbib@sw}
% The boolean \cmd\footinbib@sw\ signifies that 
% text footnotes are to be set in the bibliography, as endnotes.
% 
% The document may set the value one way or the other via
% the following two class options.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{footinbib}{\@booleantrue\footinbib@sw}
\DeclareOption{nofootinbib}{\@booleanfalse\footinbib@sw}
%    \end{macrocode}
% The default value is \cmd\false@sw, and the society or journal
% may override the default. 
% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@booleanfalse\footinbib@sw
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsubsection{altaffilletter}%
% 
% \begin{macro}{\altaffilletter@sw}
% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
% Determine the procedure \cmd\thefootnote\ used in frontmatter: 
% the footnote symbol used in titlepage footnotes.
%     \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{altaffilletter}{\@booleantrue\altaffilletter@sw}%
\DeclareOption{altaffilsymbol}{\@booleanfalse\altaffilletter@sw}%
\@booleanfalse\altaffilletter@sw
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsubsection{superbib}%
%
% \begin{macro}{\place@bibnumber}
% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
% The procedure \cmd\place@bibnumber\ produces the number
% at the head of the \cmd\bibitem, in the bibliography.
% By default, it has the \cmd\bibnumfmt\ meaning assigned by the \classname{natbib} package.
% It may be overridden by society, journal, or by the document options.
%
%     \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{superbib}{%
 \let\place@bibnumber\place@bibnumber@sup
}%
\def\place@bibnumber{\NATx@bibnumfmt}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\place@bibnumber@sup}
% \begin{macro}{\place@bibnumber@inl}
% For producing the \cmd\bibitem\ device,
% we define two procedures to select from.
%
% Note that we could have used \classname{natbib}'s \cmd\ifNAT@super\
% switch, but it does not allow for altering the meaning of \cmd\bibnumfmt.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\place@bibnumber@sup#1{\textsuperscript{#1}}%
\def\place@bibnumber@inl#1{[#1]}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsubsection{citeautoscript}%
% \begin{macro}{\citeautoscript@sw}
% This class option allows you to automatically accomodate a change from non-superscripted, numbered references
% to superscripted, bunmbered references.
%
% Note: you should always mark up your document with the assumption that references are \emph{not} going to be superscripted.
% Otherwise this option has no hope of working properly.
%
%     \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{citeautoscript}{\@booleantrue\citeautoscript@sw}%
\@booleanfalse\citeautoscript@sw
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsubsection{Variants on the Bibliography Style}%
% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) provide option longbibliography}
%
% \revtex\ anticipates that a society or journal will provide two related Bib\TeX bibliography style variants,
% designating one as the default.
% A pair of document class options \classoption{longbibliography} and \classoption{nolongbibliography}
% allows the user to explicitly select between them. 
% \begin{macro}{\longbibliography@sw}
%
%\changes{4.2a}{2017/11/21}{(MD) Make long bibliography style the default now.}
% \revtex's default for \cmd\longbibliography@sw\ is \cmd\true@sw.
%
%     \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{longbibliography}{\@booleantrue\longbibliography@sw}%
\DeclareOption{nolongbibliography}{\@booleanfalse\longbibliography@sw}%
\@booleantrue\longbibliography@sw
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\eprint@enable@sw}
% \changes{4.1o}{2010/02/10}{(AO, 580) Provide a document class option to turn off production of eprint field in bibliography.} 
%
% The document class options \classoption{eprint} and \classoption{noeprint}
% give the user the ability to turn off production of the \texttt{eprint} field in the bibliography. 
%     \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{eprint}{\@booleantrue\eprint@enable@sw}%
\DeclareOption{noeprint}{\@booleanfalse\eprint@enable@sw}%
\@booleantrue\eprint@enable@sw
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsubsection{Simplex/Duplex Pages}%
%
% \begin{macro}{\twoside@sw}
% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) coordinate \cs{if@twoside} with \cs{twoside@sw}}
% The flag \cmd\twoside@sw\ signifies that the document is to be 
% formatted for duplex printing.
% After the preamble is processed, we align the value
% of the kernel \cmd\newif\ switch \cmd\if@twoside\ 
% to that of \cmd\twoside@sw. 
% \cmd\if@twoside\ itself is used in the kernel's
% \cmd\cleardoublepage\ and \cmd\@outputpage\ procedures.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@booleanfalse\twoside@sw
\appdef\document@inithook{%
 \twoside@sw{\@twosidetrue}{\@twosidefalse}%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{4.d had twoside option setting twoside switch to false}
% The complementary options \classoption{twoside} and \classoption{oneside}
% assert formatting for duplex or simplex printing, respectively.
% At the same time, we arrange for the selection of the page grid 
% with respect to the marginal column:
% Because \cmd\if@reversemargin\ remains default (false),
% if duplex printing, this column will always be on the (right),
% if simplex printing, it will always be on the (outside).
% QUERY: correct choice?
%FIXME: assign \cmd\if@mparswitch\ later (and protect the assignment, too). 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{twoside}{\@booleantrue \twoside@sw\@mparswitchfalse}%
\DeclareOption{oneside}{\@booleanfalse\twoside@sw\@mparswitchtrue}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsubsection{Two-Column Page Grid}%
%
% \begin{macro}{\twocolumn@sw}
% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
% \changes{4.1p}{2010/02/24}{(AO, 583) Provide interface to \classname{ltxgrid} \cs{onecolumn@grid@setup} and \cs{twocolumn@grid@setup}} 
% The flag \cmd\twocolumn@sw\ signifies that the document is to be 
% formatted in the two-column page grid.
%
% If no options relating to page grid are invoked by 
% \cmd\AtBeginDcoument\ time, we set default values.
% Up to that point, the class can check if \cmd\twocolumn@sw\
% is \cmd\undefined\ to see if any related options have been invoked.
%
% \classoption{onecolumn} specifies one-column page grid.
% The \classoption{twocolumn} class option employs the standard mechanism for
% changing the column grid: the \classname{ltxgrid} package.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{onecolumn}{\@booleanfalse\twocolumn@sw}%
\DeclareOption{twocolumn}{\@booleantrue\twocolumn@sw}%
\@booleanfalse\twocolumn@sw
%    \end{macrocode}
% The column grid is determined by the state of the switch \cmd\twocolumn@sw
% and is effected at \cmd\class@documenthook\ time.
% The society or journal file may re-define \cmd\select@column@grid\ 
% to accomodate, e.g., more than two choices for the page grid. 
%
% Note that \cmd\open@column@two\ adds items to the Main Vertical List, 
% so constitutes the true beginning of the document.
%
% Note also that if the selected column grid is a one-column grid, 
% there is nothing to do, because \classname{ltxgrid} has already
% set that up via \cmd\@begindocumenthook.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\select@column@grid{%
 \twocolumn@sw{%
  \twocolumn@grid@setup
  \open@twocolumn
 }{%
  \onecolumn@grid@setup
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{verbatim}
% \open@onecolumn
%    \end{verbatim}
%    \begin{macrocode}
 }%
}%
\appdef\class@documenthook{%
 \select@column@grid
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\clear@document}
% \changes{4.1n}{2009/12/05}{(AO, 569) Use of \classname{hyperref} interferes with column balancing of last page}%
%
% We install into \cmd\class@enddocumenthook\ 
% a trap for the procedure \cmd\clearpage\ that attempts to end the current page.
% This procedure needs to be headpatched with \cmd\close@column\ to end the current page grid. 
%
% This procedure is executed after all typesetting is complete
% i.e., after items like \cmd\printtables, as well as all commands queued up by \cmd\AtEndDocument. 
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\appdef\setup@hook{%
 \let\clearpage@ltx\clearpage
 \prepdef\clear@document{\let\clearpage\clearpage@ltx\let\clear@document\@empty\close@column}%
 \appdef\class@documenthook{%
  \appdef\class@enddocumenthook{%
   \let\clearpage\clear@document
  }%
 }%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\authoryear@sw}
% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 457) Endnotes to be sorted in with numerical citations.}%
% The boolean \cmd\authoryear@sw\ signifies that we are to use author-year citations rather than numerical citations.
% 
% The \classoption{author-year} class option selects ``'author-year'' citations;  
% \classoption{numerical} selectes ``numerical'' citations.
% The former is the default.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{author-year}{\@booleantrue\authoryear@sw}%
\DeclareOption{numerical}{\@booleanfalse\authoryear@sw}%
\@booleanfalse\authoryear@sw
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\galley@sw}
% The boolean \cmd\galley@sw\ signifies that 
% the document is to be formatted in galley style.
%
% Asserting both \cmd\galley@sw\ and \cmd\preprintsty@sw\ 
% may produce strange formatting results, but it is not illegal.
% However, it \emph{is} illegal to assert galley and any 
% twocolumn option.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \classoption{galley} emulates setting the galleys of
% a two-column journal.
% CHANGED: this option should effectively set \cmd\preprintsty@sw\ false.
% NOTE: it makes no sense to assert both galley and twocolumn.
% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Class option galley sets \cs{preprintsty@sw} to false}
% 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{galley}{%
  \ExecuteOptions{onecolumn}%
  \@booleantrue\galley@sw
  \@booleanfalse\preprintsty@sw
  \appdef\setup@hook{%
    \advance\textwidth-\columnsep
    \textwidth.5\textwidth
  }%
}%
\@booleanfalse\galley@sw
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsubsection{raggedbottom or flushbottom}%
% \begin{macro}{\raggedcolumn@sw}
% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
% The class options \classoption{raggedbottom} and \classoption{flushbottom} determine whether the columns (page)
% are ragged bottom or flush bottom.
% Note that we do not select a default here; that is done by the journal substyle.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{raggedbottom}{\@booleantrue\raggedcolumn@sw}
\DeclareOption{flushbottom}{\@booleanfalse\raggedcolumn@sw}
\@booleanfalse\raggedcolumn@sw
\appdef\setup@hook{%
 \raggedcolumn@sw{\raggedbottom}{\flushbottom}%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsubsection{tightenlines}%
%
% This class option specifies that standard leading 
% is to be used to set the type.
% If lacking, the leading will be loose.
%
% \begin{macro}{\tightenlines@sw}
% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
% The boolean \cmd\tightenlines@sw\ signifies that 
% the leading is to be made standard amount.
% If false, it means that the leading is to be set extra open.
% Has no effect on 10pt size option.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{tightenlines}{\@booleantrue\tightenlines@sw}
\@booleanfalse\tightenlines@sw
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsubsection{lengthcheck}%
%
% \begin{macro}{\lengthcheck@sw}
% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
% The flag \cmd\lengthcheck@sw\ signifies that 
% the length checking is in effect.
% It is up to the individual journal substyle 
% to alter its formatting accordingly.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@booleanfalse\lengthcheck@sw
%    \end{macrocode}
% This class option specifies that the formatted document 
% should approach as closely as possible the
% formatting of an actual journal article 
% to facilitate the author's performance of a length check.
%
%FIXME: society or journal may have its own definition of this option.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{lengthcheck}{%
 \@booleantrue\lengthcheck@sw
 \ExecuteOptions{reprint}%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% In addition, if length checking is in effect, we will enable 
% the tally of text length. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\appdef\setup@hook{%
 \lengthcheck@sw{\@booleantrue\tally@box@size@sw}{}%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsubsection{Draft and Final}%
%
% \begin{macro}{\draft@sw}
% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
% The flag \cmd\draft@sw\ signifies that the document is to be 
% formatted in draft mode. 
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\appdef\setup@hook{%
 \draft@sw{\overfullrule 5\p@}{\overfullrule\z@}%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% Certain packages may pay attention to the 
% class option \classoption{draft} that sets this Boolean.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{draft}{\@booleantrue\draft@sw}%
\DeclareOption{final}{\@booleanfalse\draft@sw}%
\@booleanfalse\draft@sw
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsubsection{eqsecnum}%
%
% \begin{macro}{\eqsecnum@sw}
% The flag \cmd\eqsecnum@sw\ signifies that equations are to be 
% numbered with the section, e.g., ``Eq. (2.13)''.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\appdef\setup@hook{%
 \eqsecnum@sw{%
  \@addtoreset{equation}{section}%
  \def\theequation@prefix{\arabic{section}.}%
 }{}%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% The \classoption{eqsecnum} class option signifies that equations are
% to be numbered within sections.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{eqsecnum}{\@booleantrue\eqsecnum@sw}%
\@booleanfalse\eqsecnum@sw
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsubsection{secnumarabic}%
% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) No longer use \cs{secnumarabic@sw}, instead use \cs{setup@secnums}}
% The \classoption{secnumarabic} class option signifies that sectioning commands are
% to be numbered arabic: 
% the procedure \cmd\secnums@arabic\ is executed as the default. 
% Otherwise, the procedure \cmd\secnums@rtx\ determines things. 
% The society or journal may redefine either procedure,
% and may change the definition of \cmd\setup@secnums\ itself, 
% thereby establishing a different default. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\appdef\setup@hook{%
 \setup@secnums
}%
\DeclareOption{secnumarabic}{%
 \def\setup@secnums{\secnums@arabic}%
}%
\def\setup@secnums{\secnums@rtx}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% The code that defines \cmd\secnums@rtx\ and \cmd\secnums@arabic\ appears
% in Section~\ref{sec:secnumarabic}.
%
% \begin{macro}{fleqn}
% FIXME: model fleqn after amsfonts. I no longer understand why I said this.
% \file{fleqn.clo} is not a package, so it can simply be \cmd\input. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{fleqn}{%
 \input{fleqn.clo}%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsubsection{floats/endfloats}%
%
% \begin{macro}{\floats@sw}
% \begin{macro}{\floatp@sw}
% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
% The Boolean \cmd\floats@sw\ signifies that floats are to be floated;
% if false, that floats are to be deferred to the end of the document.
% By default, the former.
% Note that the state of this Boolean is to be changed by 
% the document class in response to user-selected options.
% 
% This boolean and the assignment of its default value is done by
% the \classname{ltxutil} package.
%
% The Boolean \cmd\floatp@sw\ signifies that endfloats are to be set one per page;
% if false, that endfloats are to be set with multiple floats per page permitted.
% By default, the latter.
% Note that the state of this Boolean is to be changed by 
% the document class in response to user-selected options.
% The default is established here.
%
% These options control, via the Boolean \cmd\floats@sw, 
% whether floats are to be migrated to the end of the document.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{floats}{\@booleantrue\floats@sw\@booleanfalse\floatp@sw}
\DeclareOption{endfloats}{\@booleanfalse\floats@sw\@booleanfalse\floatp@sw}
\DeclareOption{endfloats*}{\@booleanfalse\floats@sw\@booleantrue\floatp@sw}
\@booleantrue\floats@sw
\@booleantrue\floatp@sw
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsubsection{titlepage/notitlepage}%
% These options control, via \cmd\titlepage@sw, 
% whether the title block is to be set on a separate page.
%
% \begin{macro}{\titlepage@sw}
% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
% The flag \cmd\titlepage@sw\ signifies that a forced 
% page break is to follow the title page: the article
% title appears on a page by itself.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{titlepage}{\@booleantrue\titlepage@sw}
\DeclareOption{notitlepage}{\@booleanfalse\titlepage@sw}
\@booleanfalse\titlepage@sw
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsubsection{Substyle and Sub-substyle}%
%
% \begin{macro}{\change@society}
% \begin{macro}{\change@journal}
% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) Provide more diagnostics when \cs{@society} is assigned.}
% If the society or, resp., journal has already been assigned,
% notify user whether it is being overridden. 
% 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\change@society#1{%
 \def\@tempa{#1}%
 \@ifxundefined\@society{%
  \class@info{Selecting society \@tempa}%
  \let\@society\@tempa
 }{%
  \@ifx{\@tempa\@society}{}{%
   \class@warn{Conflicting society \@tempa<>\@society; not selected}%
  }%
 }%
}%
\def\change@journal#1{%
 \def\@tempa{#1}%
 \@ifxundefined\@journal{%
  \class@info{Selecting journal \@tempa}%
  \let\@journal\@tempa
 }{%
  \@ifx{\@tempa\@journal}{}{%
   \class@warn{Conflicting journal \@tempa<>\@journal; not selected}%
  }%
 }%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% Here had been the class options relating to the APS.
% Now that all societies are on an equal footing, this code is in the
% respective \file{.rtx} file.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsubsection{Optical Society of America}%
% Here are the class options relating to the Optical Society of America.
%
% Note: as of 2008, the only OSA module being distributed by ctan is \file{osajnl.rtx}.
% The class options declared here are, I think, unused.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{osa}{\change@society{osa}\let\@journal\@undefined}%
\DeclareOption{osameet}{\change@society{osa}\def\@journal{osameet}}%
\DeclareOption{opex}{\change@society{osa}\def\@journal{opex}}%
\DeclareOption{tops}{\change@society{osa}\def\@journal{tops}}%
\DeclareOption{josa}{\change@society{osa}\def\@journal{josa}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\rtx@require@packages}
% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Read in all required packages together}
% The procedure \cmd\rtx@require@packages\ accumulates all \cmd\RequirePackage\ statements
% in the course of loading the document class. 
% Carrying out these operations at that time is needed:
% \cmd\ProcessOptions\ must be executed first. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\rtx@require@packages\@empty
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\MakeUppercase}
% \begin{macro}{\MakeLowercase}
% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Package textcase is now simply a required package}
% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Read in all required packages together}
% \changes{4.1g}{2009/10/07}{(AO, 538) \cs{MakeTextUppercase} inappropriately expands the double backslash}
% We load the \classname{textcase} package of David Carlisle.
% Now that its bug of long standing has been repaired, we no longer need to doctor it up. 
% And, because its loading has been deferred until \cmd\rtx@require@packages\ time, 
% we no longer override \LaTeX\ here. Instead, the \classname{textcase} package
% will be asked to do that. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\appdef\rtx@require@packages{%
 \RequirePackage[overload]{textcase}%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% The following code used to
% let the \classname{textcase} commands override those of \LaTeX:
%    \begin{verbatim}
%\appdef\setup@hook{%
% \expandafter
% \let\csname MakeUppercase \expandafter\endcsname
%    \csname MakeTextUppercase \endcsname
% \expandafter
% \let\csname MakeLowercase \expandafter\endcsname
%    \csname MakeTextLowercase \endcsname
% }%
%    \end{verbatim}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{amsfonts}
% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Read in all required packages together}
% The class option \classoption{amsfonts} has the
% same effect as if the document preamble contained
% a \cmd\usepackage\verb${amsfonts}$ statement.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{amsfonts}{%
  \def\class@amsfonts{\RequirePackage{amsfonts}}%
}%
\DeclareOption{noamsfonts}{%
  \let\class@amsfonts\@empty
}%
\appdef\rtx@require@packages{%
 \@ifxundefined\class@amsfonts{}{\class@amsfonts}%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{amssymb}
% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Read in all required packages together}
% The class option \classoption{amssymb} has the
% same effect as if the document preamble contained
% a \cmd\usepackage\verb${amssymb}$ statement.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{amssymb}{%
  \def\class@amssymb{\RequirePackage{amssymb}}%
}%
\DeclareOption{noamssymb}{%
  \let\class@amssymb\@empty
}%
\appdef\rtx@require@packages{%
 \@ifxundefined\class@amssymb{}{\class@amssymb}%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{amsmath}
% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Read in all required packages together}
% The class option \classoption{amsmath} has the
% same effect as if the document preamble contained
% a \cmd\usepackage\verb${amsmath}$ statement.
%
% We require version 1.2 (datestamped 1997/03/20) or later.
% The \expandafter\cmd\csname ver@amsmath.sty\endcsname, will 
% 
% \LaTeX\ note:
% Certain \LaTeX\ procedures have an arbitrary and pointless restriction that they may be used only within the preamble.
% We get around this by preserving the procedures in private \cmd\csname s.
%
% FIXME note: it is difficult to ensure that an error summary will be printed on the console at the very end,
% but \classname{ltxgrid} allows accomplishing this via an interrupt, put down at \cmd\AtEndDocument\ time.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{amsmath}{%
  \def\class@amsmath{\RequirePackage{amsmath}[\ver@amsmath@prefer]}%
}%
\DeclareOption{noamsmath}{%
  \let\class@amsmath\@empty
}%
\appdef\rtx@require@packages{%
 \preserve@LaTeX
 \@ifxundefined\class@amsmath{}{\class@amsmath}%
 \appdef\class@enddocumenthook{\test@amsmath@ver}%
}%
\appdef\preserve@LaTeX{%
 \let\@ifl@aded@LaTeX\@ifl@aded
 \let\@ifpackageloaded@LaTeX\@ifpackageloaded
 \let\@pkgextension@LaTeX\@pkgextension
 \let\@ifpackagelater@LaTeX\@ifpackagelater
 \let\@ifl@ter@LaTeX\@ifl@ter
 \let\@ifl@t@r@LaTeX\@ifl@t@r
 \let\@parse@version@LaTeX\@parse@version
}%
\appdef\restore@LaTeX{%
 \let\@ifl@aded\@ifl@aded@LaTeX
 \let\@ifpackageloaded\@ifpackageloaded@LaTeX
 \let\@pkgextension\@pkgextension@LaTeX
 \let\@ifpackagelater\@ifpackagelater@LaTeX
 \let\@ifl@ter\@ifl@ter@LaTeX
 \let\@ifl@t@r\@ifl@t@r@LaTeX
 \let\@parse@version\@parse@version@LaTeX
}%
\def\test@amsmath@ver{%
 \begingroup
  \restore@LaTeX
  \@ifpackageloaded{amsmath}{%
   \@ifpackagelater{amsmath}{\ver@amsmath@prefer}{}{%
     \class@warn{%
      You have loaded amsmath, version "\csname ver@amsmath.sty\endcsname",\MessageBreak
      but this class requires version "\ver@amsmath@prefer", or later.\MessageBreak
      Please update your LaTeX installation.
     }%
   }%
  }{%
  }%
 \endgroup
}%
\def\ver@amsmath@prefer{2000/01/15 v2.05 AMS math features}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsubsection{Presenting Authors and Their Affiliations}%
% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Code relating to new syntax for frontmatter has been placed in \file{ltxfront.dtx}}
% Class options for presenting authors and their affiliations are now defined in 
% \file{ltxfront.dtx}.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsubsection{Typeset by \revtex}%
%
% \begin{macro}{\byrevtex@sw}
% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
% The flag \cmd\byrevtex@sw\ signifies that the document should
% bear an imprint to the effect that it was formatted by this document class.
%
% The class option \classoption{byrevtex} signifies that you want the 
% ``Typeset by \revtex'' byline to appear on your formatted output.
% By default, no such byline appears.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{byrevtex}{\@booleantrue\byrevtex@sw}%
\@booleanfalse\byrevtex@sw
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Attempt to fix float placement failure}%
% 
% \begin{macro}{\force@deferlist@sw}
% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
% \revtex\ uses the \classname{ltxgrid} package, which provides the ability to attempt repairs when 
% \LaTeX's float placement mechanism is about to fail, but that facility is turned off by default.
% Users should invoke the \classoption{floatfix} document class option to enable this \LaTeX\ extension.
% If not, a helpful message is printed in the log, indicating how to work around the difficulty.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{floatfix}{\@booleantrue\force@deferlist@sw}%
\DeclareOption{nofloatfix}{\@booleanfalse\force@deferlist@sw}%
\@booleanfalse\force@deferlist@sw
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@fltovf}
% \begin{macro}{\@fltstk}
%  The \LaTeX\ kernel error message \cmd\@fltovf\ may now be a bit more helpful to the user;
%  likewise for the \cmd\@fltstk\ message of \classname{ltxgrid}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\gdef\@fltovf{%
 \@latex@error{%
  Too many unprocessed floats%
  \force@deferlist@sw{}{; try class option [floatfix]}%
 }\@ehb
}%
\def\@fltstk{%
 \@latex@warning{%
  A float is stuck (cannot be placed)%
  \force@deferlist@sw{}{; try class option [floatfix]}%
 }%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ltxgrid@info@sw}
% \begin{macro}{\outputdebug@sw}
% The two options \classoption{ltxgridinfo} and \classoption{outputdebug} turn on informative diagnostics within the 
% package \classname{ltxgrid}. Only people who really want to see this output will select these class options.
% Consult documentation for the \classname{ltxgrid} package to see what output the related switches enable.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{ltxgridinfo}{%
 \@booleantrue\ltxgrid@info@sw
%\@booleantrue\ltxgrid@foot@info@sw
}%
\DeclareOption{outputdebug}{%
 \@booleantrue\outputdebug@sw
 \@booleantrue\ltxgrid@info@sw
 \@booleantrue\ltxgrid@foot@info@sw
 \traceoutput
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Option to relax page height}%
% 
% \begin{macro}{\textheight@sw}
% The \classname{ltxgrid} package can set text pages to their natural height or force them to the full 
% text height; the latter is the default.
% If setting the pages with a variable length,
% the running foot will move up or down with the natural length of the text column.
% While I recommend against doing so, this option will turn that switch to the latter setting.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{raggedfooter}{\@booleanfalse\textheight@sw}%
\DeclareOption{noraggedfooter}{\@booleantrue\textheight@sw}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Selecting procedure for processing abstract}%
% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Remove options newabstract and oldabstract}
% Code defining options \classoption{newabstract} and \classoption{oldabstract} has been removed.
%
% \subsection{Option to turn on diagnostics in the frontmatter}%
% 
% \begin{macro}{\frontmatterverbose@sw}
% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Code relating to new syntax for frontmatter has been placed in \file{ltxfront.dtx}}
% A diagnostic option, not for the average enduser, which reveals 
% the workings of the frontmatter.
% This code interfaces to that of \file{ltxfront.dtx}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{frontmatterverbose}{\@booleantrue\frontmatterverbose@sw}%
\@booleanfalse\frontmatterverbose@sw
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% 
% \begin{macro}{\linenumbers@sw}
% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/07}{(AO, 513) Add class option linenumbers: number the lines a la \classname{lineno}}
% \changes{4.1n}{2009/12/13}{(AO, 573) arrange to load \classname{lineno} after any other packages.}%
% An option to number the lines of type in the output in the manner of \classname{lineno}.
%
% At present, we use that very package to implement this functionality.
% This means that users may modify the workings of that package per its documentation (which see).
%
% However, compatibility with \classname{amsmath} requires that \classname{lineno} be loaded afterwards.
% Therefore, we defer loading of this package until after the preamble is completed. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{linenumbers}{%
 \appdef
 \class@documenthook{%
  \RequirePackage{lineno}[2005/11/02 v4.41]%
  \linenumbersep4pt\relax
  \linenumbers\relax
 }%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% By default, line numbering is off. 
% \end{macro}
% 
% \begin{macro}{\NAT@merge}
% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/15}{(AO, 523) Add class option nomerge, to turn off new natbib 8.3 syntax}
% Add class option nomerge, to turn off natbib 8.3 syntax for citation key. 
% The default value of REVTeX 4.1 for \cmd\NAT@merge is \cmd\thr@@, which turns on  
% the new syntax along with its semantics. 
% Legacy documents that would be incompatible with the new syntax can be successfully processed 
% with class option \classoption{nomerge}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{nomerge}{%
 \appdef\setup@hook{%
  \@ifnum{\NAT@merge>\z@}{\let\NAT@merge\z@}{}%
 }%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Default Option, Society, Journal, and pointsize}%
%
% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 488) Change processing of options to allow an unused option to specify society and journal}%
% This change will not break OSA documents because that society is still built in to revtex4.
%
% \begin{macro}{\@parse@class@options@society}
% \begin{macro}{\@parse@class@options@}
% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Procedures \cs{@parse@class@options@society} and \cs{@parse@class@options@journal} and friends}
% The procedure \cmd\@parse@class@options@society\ parses the options passed to this document class 
% for the \cmd\@society. 
% It is like \cmd\ProcessOptions*\ in that it accesses
% \cmd\@ptionlist\{\cmd\@currname.\cmd\@currext\}.
% Any undefined option is considered: if there is a corresponding \file{.rtx} file,
% it will change the society accordingly
% and define a placeholder class option for the society thus found
% (thus preventing a spurious "option not found" message). 
% 
% The procedure \cmd\@parse@class@options@\ parses the document's options
% for any that set the \cmd\csname\ provided. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@parse@class@options@society{%
 \edef\@tempa{\@ptionlist{\@currname.\@currext}}%
 \expandafter\@for\expandafter\CurrentOption\expandafter:\expandafter=\@tempa\do{%
  \expandafter\@ifnotrelax\csname ds@\CurrentOption\endcsname{}{%
   \IfFileExists{\CurrentOption\substyle@post.\substyle@ext}{%
    \expandafter\change@society\expandafter{\CurrentOption}%
    \expandafter\let\csname ds@\CurrentOption\endcsname\@empty
   }{}%
  }%
 }%
}%
\def\@parse@class@options@#1{%
 \edef\@tempa{\@ptionlist{\@currname.\@currext}}%
 \expandafter\@for\expandafter\CurrentOption\expandafter:\expandafter=\@tempa\do{%
  \expandafter\@ifnotrelax\csname ds@\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
   \begingroup\csname ds@\CurrentOption\endcsname
    \@ifxundefined#1{%
     \endgroup
    }{%
     \expandafter\endgroup\expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1}%
    }%
  }{}%
 }%
}%
\def\@parse@class@options@journal{%
 \edef\@tempa{\@ptionlist{\@currname.\@currext}}%
 \expandafter\@for\expandafter\CurrentOption\expandafter:\expandafter=\@tempa\do{%
  \expandafter\@ifnotrelax\csname ds@\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
   \begingroup
    \csname ds@\CurrentOption\endcsname
    \@ifxundefined\@journal{%
     \endgroup
    }{%
     \expandafter\endgroup\expandafter\def\expandafter\@journal\expandafter{\@journal}%
    }%
  }{}%
 }%
}%
\def\@parse@class@options{%
 \edef\@tempa{\@ptionlist{\@currname.\@currext}}%
 \expandafter\@for\expandafter\CurrentOption\expandafter:\expandafter=\@tempa\do{%
  \expandafter\@ifnotrelax\csname ds@\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
   \begingroup
    \csname ds@\CurrentOption\endcsname
    \@ifxundefined\@pointsize{%
     \endgroup
    }{%
     \expandafter\endgroup\expandafter\def\expandafter\@pointsize\expandafter{\@pointsize}%
    }%
  }{%
   \IfFileExists{\CurrentOption\substyle@post.\substyle@ext}{%
    \expandafter\change@society\expandafter{\CurrentOption}%
    \expandafter\let\csname ds@\CurrentOption\endcsname\@empty
   }{}%
  }%
 }%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \changes{4.1j}{2009/10/25}{(AO, 545) hypertext capabilities off by default; enable with \classoption{hypertext}}
% The class option \classoption{hypertext} enables the built-in hypertext capabilities,
% which coincide with those of \classname{custom-bib}-generated BIBTeX styles
% using the guard code \texttt{hypertext}. 
%
% Note that APS has these capabilities turned off by default;
% Loading the hyperref package turns them on.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{hypertext}{\hypertext@enable@ltx}%
\appdef\document@inithook{\@ifpackageloaded{hyperref}{\hypertext@enable@ltx}{}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% The default handling for a document class option depends upon whether the \cmd\@society\ is 
% defined. 
%
% If not, then hunt for a \file{.rtx} file with that name.
% If it exists, then we will take this option as the name of the society, 
% otherwise, declare the option as not used.
% 
% (This behavior is similar to the \LaTeX2.09 handling, where
% one looked for a \file{.sty} file, except that 
% in this case, we must provide for journal substyles that may be 
% defined in the society file, or have their own journal substyle file.)
%
% At the point where the class file is finished loading, 
% we then read in the society file. 
% That file can define further class options, such as the journal substyle.
%
% For users, this will mean that they can specify the society and journal simply 
% by specifying first the former and then the latter among their document class options.
% The society \emph{must} have a corresponding \file{.rtx}.
%
% \changes{4.1b}{2008/05/29}{The csname substyle@ext is now defined without a dot (.), to be compatible with \LaTeX usage (see @clsextension and @pkgextension).}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</options>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*package>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@process@society}
% \begin{macro}{\@process@journal}
% \begin{macro}{\@process@pointsize}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\substyle@post{4-2}%
\def\substyle@ext{rtx}%
\DeclareOption*{\OptionNotUsed}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% A society substyle may define its own options, via \cmd\DeclareOption. 
%
% At the end of this document class, we process the society file,
% using \file{aps.rtx} if none has been specified in the document.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@process@society#1{%
 \@ifxundefined\@society{%
  \class@warn{No Society specified, using default society #1}%
  \def\@society{#1}\let\@journal\@undefined
 }{}%
 \expandafter\input\expandafter{\@society\substyle@post.\substyle@ext}%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% A society substyle can encompass any number of journal substyles;
% we use the following procedure to invoke the proper one.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@process@journal#1{%
 \@ifxundefined\@journal{%
  \class@warn{No journal specified, using default #1}%
  \def\@journal{#1}%
 }{}%
 \expandafter\expandafter
 \expandafter\rtx@do@substyle
 \expandafter\expandafter
 \expandafter{\expandafter\@society\@journal}%
}%
\def\rtx@do@substyle#1{%
 \InputIfFileExists{#1\substyle@post.\substyle@ext}{}{\csname rtx@#1\endcsname}%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% 
% Document class options \classoption{10pt}, \classoption{11pt}, and \classoption{12pt} 
% are implemented by \revtex\ itself and determine \cmd\@pointsize. 
% These provide formatting settings appropriate to the society's journals. 
%
% If not specified by the document, a value \cmd\@pointsize@default\ is used. 
% This default can be set by the journal. Here, the society sets its default. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@process@pointsize#1{%
 \@ifxundefined\@pointsize{%
  \def\@pointsize{#1}%
  \class@warn{No type size specified, using default \@pointsize}%
 }{}%
 \expandafter\expandafter
 \expandafter\rtx@do@substyle
 \expandafter\expandafter
 \expandafter{\expandafter\@society\@pointsize pt}%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Class-Asserted Options}%
% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Removed invocation of nonexistent class option \protect\classoption{groupauthors} and all other class options that should only be invoked by the document. (Otherwise precedence of class options does not work.)}
% Here we establish the default document class options.
% Those of the document itself will override these.
%
% \section{Procedures Dependent Upon Options}
%
% Here we introduce \classname{classes.dtx} definitions for 
% the page styles that people will expect to be able to use.
% \begin{macro}{\ps@headings}
% \begin{macro}{\ps@myheadings}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \def\ps@headings{%
      \let\@oddfoot\@empty\let\@evenfoot\@empty
      \def\@evenhead{\thepage\hfil\slshape\leftmark}%
      \def\@oddhead{{\slshape\rightmark}\hfil\thepage}%
      \let\@mkboth\markboth
    \def\sectionmark##1{%
      \markboth {\MakeUppercase{%
        \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\z@
          \thesection\quad
        \fi
        ##1}}{}}%
    \def\subsectionmark##1{%
      \markright {%
        \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\@ne
          \thesubsection\quad
        \fi
        ##1}}}%
\def\ps@myheadings{%
    \let\@oddfoot\@empty\let\@evenfoot\@empty
    \def\@evenhead{\thepage\hfil\slshape\leftmark}%
    \def\@oddhead{{\slshape\rightmark}\hfil\thepage}%
    \let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo
    \let\sectionmark\@gobble
    \let\subsectionmark\@gobble
    }%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ps@article}
% \begin{macro}{\ps@article@final}
% \begin{macro}{\ps@preprint}
% \changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{Move after process options, so the following test works}
% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Defer decision until \cs{AtBeginDocument} time}
% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Insert procedure \cs{checkindate}}
% \changes{4.0rc1}{2001/06/17}{Running headers always as if two-sided}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\ps@article{%
    \def\@evenhead{\let\\\heading@cr\thepage\quad\checkindate\hfil{\leftmark}}%
    \def\@oddhead{\let\\\heading@cr{\rightmark}\hfil\checkindate\quad\thepage}%
    \def\@oddfoot{}%
    \def\@evenfoot{}%
    \let\@mkboth\markboth
  \let\sectionmark\@gobble
  \let\subsectionmark\@gobble
}%
\def\ps@article@final{%
    \def\@evenhead{\let\\\heading@cr\thepage\quad\checkindate\hfil{\leftmark}}%
    \def\@oddhead{\let\\\heading@cr{\rightmark}\hfil\checkindate\quad\thepage}%
    \def\@oddfoot{}%
    \def\@evenfoot{}%
    \let\@mkboth\markboth
    \def\sectionmark##1{%
      \markboth{%
       \MakeTextUppercase{%
        \@ifnum{\c@secnumdepth >\z@}{\thesection\hskip 1em\relax}{}%
         ##1%
       }%
       }{}%
    }%
    \def\subsectionmark##1{%
      \markright {%
        \@ifnum{\c@secnumdepth >\@ne}{\thesubsection\hskip 1em\relax}{}%
         ##1%
      }%
    }%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\heading@cr{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Do not put by REVTeX in every page foot}
% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Insert procedure \cs{checkindate}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\ps@preprint{%
  \def\@oddfoot{\hfil\thepage\quad\checkindate\hfil}%
  \def\@evenfoot{\hfil\thepage\quad\checkindate\hfil}%
  \def\@oddhead{}%
  \def\@evenhead{}%
  \let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo
  \let\sectionmark\@gobble
  \let\subsectionmark\@gobble
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\@oddhead\@empty
\let\@evenhead\@empty
\let\@oddfoot\@empty
\let\@evenfoot\@empty
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\lastpage@putlabel}
% Support the default meaning of \cmd\@endpage.
% \changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{Move after process options, so \cs{clearpage} not in scope of twocolumn}
% \changes{4.1k}{2009/11/06}{(AO, 554) give the \cs{newlabel} command syntax appropriate to the hyperref package}
% Name of this macro (and the \cmd\label\ key) taken from 
% \url{CTAN:/macros/latex/contrib/other/lastpage}%
% with code optimised slightly.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\lastpage@putlabel{%
 \if@filesw
  \begingroup
    \advance\c@page\m@ne
    \immediate\write\@auxout{\string\newlabel{LastPage}{{}{\thepage}{}{}{}}}%
  \endgroup
 \fi
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Install a procedure into document endgame processing that 
% labels the last page of the document.
% This is done just before the \file{.aux} file
% is closed, and does not require a \cmd\shipout, because it writes
% directly to the \file{.aux} file.
% Note that we assume no further \cmd\shipout s will be done past this point.
% \changes{4.1n}{2009/12/09}{(AO, 569) execute the after-last-shipout procedures from within the safety of the output routine}%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\appdef\clear@document{%
 \do@output@cclv{%
  \lastpage@putlabel
  \tally@box@size@sw{\total@text}{}%
 }%
}%
\providecommand\write@column@totals{}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \section{Required Packages}
% \url{CTAN:macros/latex/contrib/other/misc/url.sty}%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\appdef\rtx@require@packages{%
 \RequirePackage{url}%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \section{Incompatible Packages}
%
% We wait until after the preamble is processed, then check for any packages 
% that might have been loaded which we know to be incompatible with \revtex.
%
% The \classname{multicol} package is incompatible with \classname{ltxgrid}, which replaces it.
% The \classname{cite} package is incompatible with \classname{natbib}, which replaces its functionality.
% The functionality of the \classname{mcite} package is provided by \classname{natbib}. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\appdef\document@inithook{%
 \incompatible@package{cite}%
 \incompatible@package{mcite}%
 \incompatible@package{multicol}%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \section{Society- and Journal-Specific Code}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@journal}
% Journal test helper, used as
% \begin{verbatim}
%\@ifx{\@journal\journal@pra}{%
%  <journal-specific setup>
%\fi
% \end{verbatim}
% Journal code might like to further specify (if as yet undefined) or distinguish on
% the following Booleans.
%
% Note: the journal substyle code should only alter the value of one of these Booleans if
% the Boolean is \cmd\undefined. This convention is what makes the document's
% options take precedence over the values set by the journal.
% 
% FIXME: make this table an exhaustive listing of all the parameters set by
% the class options.
%
% \begin{tabular}{ll}
% \cmd\@pointsize      &(10|11|12), depending on the type size\\
% \cmd\footinbib@sw    &true if footnotes are to be formatted in the bibliography\\
% \cmd\preprintsty@sw  &true for preprint and hyperpreprint\\
% \cmd\eqsecnum@sw     &true means that equations are numbered within sections\\
% \cmd\groupauthors@sw &true means authors listed separately for each address\\
% \cmd\preprint@sw     &true means to produce the preprint numbers as part of the title block\\
% \cmd\showPACS@sw     &true means to produce the PACS as part of the title block\\
% \cmd\showKEYS@sw     &true means to produce the keywords as part of the title block\\
% \cmd\@affils@sw      &true means each affiliation is printed, for each author\\
% \cmd\runinaddress@sw &true means author addresses are printed run-in\\
% \cmd\draft@sw        &true implies that PACS will be printed\\
% \cmd\tightenlines@sw &true if preprint single spaced\\
% \cmd\lengthcheck@sw  &true if length checking is in effect\\
% \cmd\byrevtex@sw     &true means to announce ``typeset by \revtex''\\
% \cmd\titlepage@sw    &true for title is to be set on a separate page\\
% \cmd\twocolumn@sw    &true if two-column page grid\\
% \cmd\twocolumn@sw    &true if we are to automatically balance the columns of the last page\\
% \cmd\twoside@sw      &true means to format pages for duplex printing\\
% \cmd\floats@sw       &false means floats are migrated to end of document\\
% \cmd\floatp@sw       &true means endfloats are set one to a page\\
% \cmd\class@amsfonts  &if \cmd\@empty, means that \classname{amsfonts} will \emph{not} be loaded\\
% \cmd\class@amssymb   &if \cmd\@empty, means that \classname{amssymb} will \emph{not} be loaded\\
% \cmd\frontmatter@footnote &if \cmd\undefined, means that the default (\cmd\footnote) will be used\\
% \cmd\place@bibnumber &if \cmd\undefined, means that the default (inline) will be used\\
% \end{tabular}
%
% Note: if \cmd\twocolumn@sw\ and \cmd\preprintsty@sw\ are both false,
% then `galley' style is in effect. The \classoption{galley} option invokes
% \classoption{onecolumn}, but does not affect the \cmd\preprintsty@sw.
%
% Note: \cmd\paperwidth\ and \cmd\paperheight\ are not integrated into this scheme,
% and should be selected by the document alone.
% \end{macro}
%
% \section{Body}
%
% \subsection{counters}
% The following definitions are probably identical to those in 
% \file{classes.dtx}%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\labelenumi{\theenumi.}
\def\theenumi{\arabic{enumi}}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\labelenumii{(\theenumii)}
\def\theenumii{\alph{enumii}}
\def\p@enumii{\theenumi}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\labelenumiii{\theenumiii.}
\def\theenumiii{\roman{enumiii}}
\def\p@enumiii{\theenumi(\theenumii)}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\labelenumiv{\theenumiv.}
\def\theenumiv{\Alph{enumiv}}
\def\p@enumiv{\p@enumiii\theenumiii}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\labelitemi{\textbullet}
\def\labelitemii{\normalfont\bfseries\textendash}
\def\labelitemiii{\textasteriskcentered}
\def\labelitemiv{\textperiodcentered}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\pagenumbering{arabic}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection{float parameters}
%
% from the old aps.sty. (DPC: same as article I think)
% AO: here, \LaTeX's standard classes fail very poorly
% (the price of backward compatability): the values for
% \cmd\floatpagefraction\ and \cmd\dblfloatpagefraction\
% need to be raised to avoid creating extremely short
% float pages.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\setcounter{topnumber}{2}
\def\topfraction{.9}
\setcounter{bottomnumber}{1}
\def\bottomfraction{.9}
\setcounter{totalnumber}{3}
\def\textfraction{.1}
\def\floatpagefraction{.9}
\setcounter{dbltopnumber}{2}
\def\dbltopfraction{.9}
\def\dblfloatpagefraction{.9}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection{List Environments}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{verse}{%
  \let\\=\@centercr
  \list{}{%
    \itemsep\z@ \itemindent -1.5em\listparindent \itemindent
    \rightmargin\leftmargin\advance\leftmargin 1.5em}\item[]%
}{%
 \endlist
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{quotation}{%
  \list{}{%
    \listparindent 1.5em
    \itemindent\listparindent
    \rightmargin\leftmargin \parsep \z@ \@plus\p@}\item[]%
}{%
 \endlist
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{quote}{%
  \list{}{%
  \rightmargin\leftmargin}\item[]%
}{%
 \endlist
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \changes{4.1b}{2008/06/30}{(AO) Structure the Abstract using the \texttt{bibliography} environment}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\descriptionlabel#1{%
  \hspace\labelsep \normalfont\bfseries #1\unskip:%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{description}{%
 \list{}{%
    \labelwidth\z@ \itemindent-\leftmargin
    \let\makelabel\descriptionlabel
 }%
}{%
 \endlist
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection{Sectioning Commands\label{sec:secnumarabic}}
%
% \subsubsection{Sectioning Commands and Their Productions}%
% The following counters are defined by LaTeX's standard document classes.
% We do likewise, then assign flag values to the productions, awaiting
% overrides.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{part}%
\let\thepart\@undefined
\newcounter{section}%
\let\thesection\@undefined
\newcounter{subsection}[section]%
\let\thesubsection\@undefined
\newcounter{subsubsection}[subsection]%
\let\thesubsubsection\@undefined
\newcounter{paragraph}[subsubsection]%
\let\theparagraph\@undefined
\newcounter{subparagraph}[paragraph]%
\let\thesubparagraph\@undefined
%    \end{macrocode}
% The procedure invoked by \cmd\setup@secnums\ provides meanings for these productions. 
% 
% \begin{macro}{\secnums@rtx}
% \begin{macro}{\secnums@arabic}
% These two procedures define the meanings of each of the productions
% of the counters of the sectioning commands,
% but only if nothing else has defined it.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\secnums@rtx{%
 \@ifxundefined\thepart{%
  \def\thepart{\Roman{part}}%
 }{}%
 \@ifxundefined\thesection{%
  \def\thesection       {\Roman{section}}%
  \def\p@section        {}%
 }{}%
 \@ifxundefined\thesubsection{%
  \def\thesubsection    {\Alph{subsection}}%
  \def\p@subsection     {\thesection\,}%
 }{}%
 \@ifxundefined\thesubsubsection{%
  \def\thesubsubsection {\arabic{subsubsection}}%
  \def\p@subsubsection  {\thesection\,\thesubsection\,}%
 }{}%
 \@ifxundefined\theparagraph{%
  \def\theparagraph     {\alph{paragraph}}%
  \def\p@paragraph      {\thesection\,\thesubsection\,\thesubsubsection\,}%
 }{}%
 \@ifxundefined\thesubparagraph{%
  \def\thesubparagraph  {\arabic{subparagraph}}%
  \def\p@subparagraph   {\thesection\,\thesubsection\,\thesubsubsection\,\theparagraph\,}%
 }{}%
}%
\def\secnums@arabic{%
 \@ifxundefined\thepart{%
  \def\thepart          {\Roman{part}}%
 }{}%
 \@ifxundefined\thesection{%
  \def\thesection       {\Roman{section}}%
  \def\p@section        {}%
 }{}%
 \@ifxundefined\thesubsection{%
  \def\thesubsection    {\thesection.\arabic{subsection}}%
  \def\p@subsection     {}%
 }{}%
 \@ifxundefined\thesubsubsection{%
  \def\thesubsubsection {\thesubsection.\arabic{subsubsection}}%
  \def\p@subsubsection  {}%
 }{}%
 \@ifxundefined\theparagraph{%
  \def\theparagraph     {\thesubsubsection.\arabic{paragraph}}%
  \def\p@paragraph      {}%
 }{}%
 \@ifxundefined\thesubparagraph{%
  \def\thesubparagraph  {\theparagraph.\arabic{subparagraph}}%
  \def\p@subparagraph   {}%
 }{}%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsubsection{The Acknowledgments Environment}%
% This user-level markup produces a head introducing 
% the acknowledgments, and acts as a wrapper for the text.
% In this implementation, it is an unnumbered section,
% but appears within the toc.
%
% For compatiability's sake, we implement it under the alternative
% spelling \env{acknowledgements}.
% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{also spelled ``acknowledgements''.}
% \changes{4.0d}{2000/05/18}{But alternative spelling is deprecated.}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{acknowledgments}{%
 \acknowledgments@sw{%
  \expandafter\section\expandafter*\expandafter{\acknowledgmentsname}%
 }{%
  \par
  \phantomsection
  \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\protect\numberline{}\acknowledgmentsname}%
 }%
}{%
 \par
}%
\@booleantrue\acknowledgments@sw
\newenvironment{acknowledgements}{%
 \replace@environment{acknowledgements}{acknowledgments}%
}{%
 \endacknowledgments
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsubsection{Part Opener}%
% section setup copied verbatim from revtex3 aps/osa.
% Does not explicitly depend on pointsize options.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\part{\par
   \addvspace{4ex}%
   \@afterindentfalse
   \secdef\@part\@spart}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@part[#1]#2{%
 \@ifnum{\c@secnumdepth >\m@ne}{%
        \refstepcounter{part}%
        \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{\thepart\hspace{1em}#1}%
 }{%
      \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}%
 }%
 \begingroup
    \parindent \z@ \raggedright
    \interlinepenalty\@M
    \@ifnum{\c@secnumdepth >\m@ne}{%
      \Large \bf \partname~\thepart%
      \par\nobreak
    }{}%
    \huge \bf
    #2%
    \markboth{}{}\par
 \endgroup
   \nobreak
   \vskip 3ex
   \@afterheading
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@spart#1{{\parindent \z@ \raggedright
    \interlinepenalty\@M
    \huge \bf
    #1\par}
    \nobreak
    \vskip 3ex
    \@afterheading}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsubsection{Stacked Heads}%
% Here are the class default definitions for sectioning commands.
% A society or a journal substyle will likely override these definitions.
%
% In doing so, you can customize the formatting for a particular level by defining,
% e.g., \cmd\@hangfrom@section\ or \cmd\@subsectioncntformat.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\section{%
  \@startsection
    {section}%
    {1}%
    {\z@}%
    {0.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
    {0.5cm}%
    {\normalfont\small\bfseries}%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\subsection{%
  \@startsection
    {subsection}%
    {2}%
    {\z@}%
    {.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
    {.5cm}%
    {\normalfont\small\bfseries}%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\subsubsection{%
  \@startsection
    {subsubsection}%
    {3}%
    {\z@}%
    {.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
    {.5cm}%
    {\normalfont\small\itshape}%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsubsection{Runin Heads}%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\paragraph{%
  \@startsection
    {paragraph}%
    {4}%
    {\parindent}%
    {\z@}%
    {-1em}%
    {\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\subparagraph{%
  \@startsection
    {subparagraph}%
    {5}%
    {\parindent}%
    {3.25ex \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
    {-1em}%
    {\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries}%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%
% \subsection{Math}
%
% \begin{macro}{\theequation}
% We change the production of the equation counter so that 
% we can accomodate the \classoption{eqsecnum} option.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\theequation{%
 \theequation@prefix\arabic{equation}%
}%
\def\theequation@prefix{}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsection{Type Size-Dependent Settings}
%
% \subsection{All Point Sizes}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\setcounter{secnumdepth}{4}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\lineskip 1pt
\normallineskip 1pt
\def\baselinestretch{1}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@lowpenalty   51
\@medpenalty  151
\@highpenalty 301
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@beginparpenalty -\@lowpenalty
\@endparpenalty   -\@lowpenalty
\@itempenalty     -\@lowpenalty
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\arraycolsep 3pt
\tabcolsep 2pt
\arrayrulewidth .4pt
\doublerulesep 2pt
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\skip\@mpfootins = 0pt
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\fboxsep  = 3.0pt
\fboxrule = 0.4pt
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection{Figures}
% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Processing delayed to \cs{AtBeginDocument} time}
%
% \begin{environment}{figure}
% We define the \env{figure} environment.
% Later, we will horse around with its meaning
% in order to accomodate \cmd\floats@sw.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{figure}
               {\@float{figure}}
               {\end@float}
\newenvironment{figure*}
               {\@dblfloat{figure}}
               {\end@dblfloat}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\listoffigures{\print@toc{lof}}%
\def\l@figure{\@dottedtocline{1}{1.5em}{2.3em}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@makecaption}
% If caption is one line long, to be centered; if lines turn, then set justified.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newlength\abovecaptionskip
\newlength\belowcaptionskip
\setlength\abovecaptionskip{10\p@}
\setlength\belowcaptionskip{2\p@}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{One-line caption sets flush left.}
% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Prevent an inner footnote from performing twice}
% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 460) ``Proper style is "FIG. 1. ..." (no colon)''}%
% There is a hook \cmd\@caption@fignum@sep\ for determining 
% the separator following the float number, e.g., ``Fig.1''.
% Formerly, we had defined it to be ``: '', now the colon has been replace by a period (full stop). 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{%
  \par
% \nobreak
  \vskip\abovecaptionskip
  \begingroup
   \small\rmfamily
   \sbox\@tempboxa{%
    \let\\\heading@cr
    \@make@capt@title{#1}{#2}%
   }%
   \@ifdim{\wd\@tempboxa >\hsize}{%
    \begingroup
     \samepage
     \flushing
     \let\footnote\@footnotemark@gobble
     \@make@capt@title{#1}{#2}\par
    \endgroup
   }{%
     \global \@minipagefalse
     \hb@xt@\hsize{\hfil\unhbox\@tempboxa\hfil}%
   }%
  \endgroup
  \vskip\belowcaptionskip
}%
\def\@make@capt@title#1#2{%
 \@ifx@empty\float@link{\@firstofone}{\expandafter\href\expandafter{\float@link}}%
  {#1}\@caption@fignum@sep#2%
}%
\def\@footnotemark@gobble{%
 \@footnotemark
 \@ifnextchar[{\@gobble@opt@i}{\@gobble}%
}%
\def\@gobble@opt@i[#1]#2{}%
\def\@mpmakefntext#1{%
 \flushing
 \parindent=1em
 \noindent
 \hb@xt@1em{\hss\@makefnmark}%
 #1%
}%
\def\@caption@fignum@sep{. }%
\def\setfloatlink{\def\float@link}%
\let\float@link\@empty
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\thefigure}
% The figure counter and float placement defaults.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{figure}
\renewcommand \thefigure {\@arabic\c@figure}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Note that we give the `!' modifier by default.
% This is an effort to avoid the syndrome wherein
% a deferred float finds itself unqualified for 
% placement, thereby getting carried until \cmd\clearpage.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\fps@figure{tbp}
\def\ftype@figure{1}
\def\ext@figure{lof}
\def\fnum@figure{\figurename~\thefigure}
%    \end{macrocode}
% We allocate a box register for use in tallying the column inches of floats of this type.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\newbox\csname fbox@\ftype@figure\endcsname
\expandafter\setbox\csname fbox@\ftype@figure\endcsname\hbox{}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsubsection{Deferring \env{figure} Floats}%
%
% We determine if figures are to float or be deferred until \cmd\printfigures\ time. 
% If so, we open the stream that will receive the deferred document portions. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\appdef\class@documenthook{%
 \do@if@floats{figure}{.fgx}%
}%
\appdef\class@enddocumenthook{%
 \printfigures\relax
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% 
% \begin{macro}{\printfigures}
% The user-level command \cmd\printfigures\ determines
% where the figures are to appear in a document in which
% \cmd\floats@sw\ is false.
% If the user invokes the \classoption{endfloats} class option and fails to
% insert a \cmd\printfigures\ command, 
% the figures will be printed at the end of the document.
% If the command is given, but floats are not being deferred, 
% it amounts to a no-op.
% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{call \cs{print@floats}}
% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{*-form mandates pagebreak}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\printfigures{%
 \@ifstar{\true@sw}{\floatp@sw{\true@sw}{\false@sw}}%
 {%
  \print@float{figure}{\oneapage}%
 }{%
  \print@float{figure}{}%
 }%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@xfloat@prep}
% We patch into the procedure \cmd\@xfloat@prep. 
% This patch applies to all floats (not \env{figure} alone)
% and makes the type center.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\appdef\@xfloat@prep{%
 \appdef\@parboxrestore{\centering}%
%\let\@makefnmark\@makefnmark@latex
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsection{Tables}
% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Processing delayed to \cs{AtBeginDocument} time}
%
% DPC: More or less taken from \file{revtex2} \file{aps.sty},
% but using dcolumn for decimal alignment.
% \begin{environment}{table}
% We define the \env{table} environment.
% Later, we will horse around with its meaning
% in order to accomodate \cmd\floats@sw.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{table}
               {\@float{table}}
               {\end@float}
\newenvironment{table*}
               {\@dblfloat{table}}
               {\end@dblfloat}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{macro}{\thetable}
% Table counter and default float placement declarations.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{table}
\renewcommand\thetable{\@Roman\c@table}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Note that we give the `!' modifier by default.
% This is an effort to avoid the syndrome wherein
% a deferred float finds itself unqualified for 
% placement, thereby getting carried until \cmd\clearpage.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\fps@table{tbp}
\def\ftype@table{2}
\def\ext@table{lot}
\def\fnum@table{\tablename~\thetable}
%    \end{macrocode}
% We allocate a box register for use in tallying the column inches of floats of this type.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\newbox\csname fbox@\ftype@table\endcsname
\expandafter\setbox\csname fbox@\ftype@table\endcsname\hbox{}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\listoftables{\print@toc{lot}}%
\let\l@table\l@figure
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\table@hook}
% \begin{macro}{\squeezetable}
% Assign a meaning to the hook installed into float processing.
%
% By default floats are \cmd\small. The \cmd\squeezetable\ declaration
% makes them smaller (\cmd\scriptsize). In general you can locally
% redefine \cmd\table@hook\ to be whatever you like.
% (DPC: |\Huge\color{magenta}|\ldots?)
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\table@hook{\small}%
\def\squeezetable{\def\table@hook{\scriptsize}}%
\appdef\@floatboxreset{\table@hook}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsubsection{Deferring \env{table} Floats}%
%
% After all packages are loaded, we decide
% if tables will float or will be deferred until \cmd\printtables\ time.
%
% We also deal with the possibility of \env{longtable} environments.
% 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\set@table@environments{%
 \floats@sw{}{%
  \let@environment{longtable@float}{longtable}%
  \let@environment{longtable}{longtable@write}%
  \let@environment{longtable*@float}{longtable*}%
  \let@environment{longtable*}{longtable*@write}%
  \let@environment{turnpage@float}{turnpage}%
  \let@environment{turnpage}{turnpage@write}%
 }%
 \do@if@floats{table}{.tbx}%
}%
\appdef\document@inithook{%
 \set@table@environments
}%
\appdef\class@enddocumenthook{%
 \printtables\relax
}%
\newenvironment{longtable@write}{%
 \write@@float{longtable}{table}%
}{%
 \endwrite@float
}%
\newenvironment{longtable*@write}{%
 \write@@float{longtable*}{table}%
}{%
 \endwrite@float
}%
\newenvironment{turnpage@write}{%
 \immediate\write\tablewrite{\string\begin{turnpage}}%
}{%
 \immediate\write\tablewrite{\string\end{turnpage}}%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\printtables}
% The user-level command \cmd\printtables\ determines
% where the tables are to appear in a document in which
% \cmd\floats@sw\ is false.
% If the user invokes the \classoption{nofloats} and fails to
% insert a \cmd\printtables\ command, 
% the tables will be printed at the end of the document.
% If the command is given, but floats are not being deferred, 
% it amounts to a no-op.
% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{only execute if appropriate}
% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{*-form mandates pagebreak}
% \changes{4.0d}{2000/05/17}{make longtable trigger the head, too}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\printtables{%
 \begingroup
  \let@environment{longtable}{longtable@float}%
  \let@environment{longtable*}{longtable*@float}%
  \let@environment{turnpage}{turnpage@anchored}%
  \prepdef\longtable{\trigger@float@par}%
  \expandafter\prepdef\csname longtable*\endcsname{\trigger@float@par}%
  \expandafter\prepdef\csname table@floats\endcsname{%
   \onecolumngrid@push
  }%
  \expandafter\appdef\csname endtable@floats\endcsname{%
   \onecolumngrid@pop
  }%
  \@ifstar{\true@sw}{\floatp@sw{\true@sw}{\false@sw}}%
  {%
   \print@float{table}{\oneapage}%
  }{%
   \print@float{table}{}%
  }%
 \endgroup
}%
\newenvironment{turnpage@anchored}{%
 \onecolumngrid@push
 \setbox\z@\vbox to\textwidth\bgroup
  \columnwidth\textheight
}{%
  \vfil
 \egroup
 \rotatebox{90}{\box\z@}%
 \onecolumngrid@pop
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsection{Videos}
%\changes{4.1r}{2010/06/22}{(AO, 595) Provide \cs{lovname} along with other List of Videos definitions.}%
%
% \begin{environment}{video}
% We define the \env{video} environment analogously to the 
% \env{figure} and \env{table} environments; it is intended to contain a video.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{video}
 {\@float{video}}
 {\end@float}%
\newenvironment{video*}
 {\@dblfloat{video}}
 {\end@dblfloat}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{macro}{\thevideo}
% The video counter, float placement defaults, strings.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{video}
\renewcommand \thevideo {\@arabic\c@video}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% File extension and localizable strings.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\ext@video{lov}%
\def\fname@video{Video}%
\def\lovname{List of Videos}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% Float type and default placement. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\fps@video{tbp}%
\def\ftype@video{4}%
\def\fnum@video{\fname@video~\thevideo}%
\appdef\document@inithook{%
 \@ifxundefined\c@float@type{}{%
  \global\setcounter{float@type}{8}%
 }%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% We allocate a box register for use in tallying the column inches of floats of this type.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\newbox\csname fbox@\ftype@video\endcsname
\expandafter\setbox\csname fbox@\ftype@video\endcsname\hbox{}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% The documentation for the \classname{hyperref} package, \file{hyperref.dtx} states:
% ``classes or package which introduce new elements need to define 
%   an equivalent  \verb+\theH<name>+  for every  \verb+\the<name>+''
% We do accordingly here.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\theHvideo\thevideo
%    \end{macrocode}
% But \file{hyperref.dtx} goes on to say, 
% ``We do make a trap to make \verb+\theH<name>+ be the same as \verb+\arabic{<name>}+,
% if \verb+\theH<name>+ is not defined\ldots''
% However, it's not doing that right now (as of 6.77u), 
% and I cannot find any such code in there anymore.
% \end{macro}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\listofvideos{\print@toc{lov}}%
\let\l@video\l@figure
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsubsection{Deferring \env{video} Floats}%
%
% We determine if videos are to float or be deferred until \cmd\printvideos\ time. 
% If so, we open the stream that will receive the deferred document portions. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\appdef\class@documenthook{%
 \do@if@floats{video}{.vdx}%
}%
\appdef\class@enddocumenthook{%
 \printvideos\relax
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% 
% \begin{macro}{\printvideos}
% The user-level command \cmd\printvideos\ determines
% where the videos are to appear in a document in which
% \cmd\floats@sw\ is false.
% If the user invokes the \classoption{endfloats} class option and fails to
% insert a \cmd\printvideos\ command, 
% the videos will be printed at the end of the document.
% If the command is given, but floats are not being deferred, 
% it amounts to a no-op.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\printvideos{%
 \@ifstar{\true@sw}{\floatp@sw{\true@sw}{\false@sw}}%
 {%
  \print@float{video}{\oneapage}%
 }{%
  \print@float{video}{}%
 }%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \section{Tabular}
% Every APS tabular has a double (Scotch) rule above and below.
% The column specifier ``d'' is implemented using the \classname{dcolumn}
% package, if available.
% FIXME: always load dcolumn!
% \begin{macro}{\tabular@hook}
% \begin{macro}{\endtabular@hook}
% \begin{environment}{ruledtabular}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\endtabular@hook{}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{verbatim}
%\RequirePackage{dcolumn}%
%    \end{verbatim}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\appdef\document@inithook{%
 \@ifpackageloaded{dcolumn}{%
  \expandafter\@ifnotrelax\csname NC@find@d\endcsname{}{%
   \newcolumntype{d}{D{.}{.}{-1}}%
  }%
 }{}%
}%
\def\toprule{\hline\hline}%
\def\colrule{\hline}%
\def\botrule{\hline\hline}%
\newenvironment{ruledtabular}{%
 \def\array@default{v}%
 \appdef\tabular@hook{\def\@halignto{to\hsize}}%
 \let\tableft@skip@default\tableft@skip
 \let\tableft@skip\tableft@skip@float
 \let\tabmid@skip@default\tabmid@skip
 \let\tabmid@skip\tabmid@skip@float
 \let\tabright@skip@default\tabright@skip
 \let\tabright@skip\tabright@skip@float
 \let\array@row@pre@default\array@row@pre
 \let\array@row@pre\array@row@pre@float
 \let\array@row@pst@default\array@row@pst
 \let\array@row@pst\array@row@pst@float
 \appdef\array@row@rst{%
  \let\array@row@pre\array@row@pre@default
  \let\array@row@pst\array@row@pst@default
  \let\tableft@skip\tableft@skip@default
  \let\tabmid@skip\tabmid@skip@default
  \let\tabright@skip\tabright@skip@default
  \appdef\tabular@hook{\let\@halignto\@empty}%
 }%
}{%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \section{Footnote Text}
%
% \changes{4.0a}{1998/06/10}{single space footnotes}
% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Frank Mittelbach, has stated in \protect\classname{multicol}: ``The kernel command \cs{@footnotetext} should not be modified.'' Thus, I have removed David Carlisle's redefinition of that command. Note, however, that later versions of \protect\classname{multicol} do not require this workaround. Belt and suspenders.}%
%
% \begin{macro}{\@makefntext}
% \begin{macro}{\@makefnmark}
% We customize the presentation of the footnote mark: it will not be italic.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@makefntext#1{%
  \def\baselinestretch{1}%
  \parindent1em%
  \noindent
  \hb@xt@1.8em{%
   \hss\@makefnmark
  }%
  #1%
  \par
}%
\def\@makefnmark{%
 \hbox{%
  \@textsuperscript{%
   \normalfont\@thefnmark
  }%
 }%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsection{Citations, Bibliography, Endnotes}
%
% \subsubsection{Bibliography}
%
% Load Patrick Daly's \classname{natbib} package,
% \url{ftp://ctan.tug.org/macros/latex/contrib/supported/natbib}
%
% Note that \classname{natbib} assumes that it loads
% over a document class, such as the \classname{article} class, 
% that has already defined \env{thebibliography} and \cmd\@listi.
%
% Note also that \classname{natbib} also installs a command
% \cmd\NAT@set@cites\ into \cmd\AtBeginDocument\ which presumes
% that the proper \cmd\bibpunct\ command has been issued.
% 
% Note that the macro \cmd\NAT@sort\ controls 
% whether citations are left alone (\cmd\NAT@sort=0), sorted (\cmd\NAT@sort=1), or sorted and compressed (\cmd\NAT@sort=2).
% Since we give \classname{natbib} the \classoption{sort\&compress} option,
% if you prefer \classoption{sort}, you need only \cmd\let \cmd\NAT@sort\ to be \cmd\@ne.
% However, if you prefer the effect of having neither \classoption{sort} nor \classoption{sort\&compress},
% you must \cmd\let \cmd\NAT@sort\ to be \cmd\z@ and you must also define 
% \cmd\let\cmd\NAT@cmprs\ to be \cmd\z@.
%
% As of version 8.2, \classname{natbib} now no longer binds at the point where it is read in.
% This means that we can freely change \cmd\NAT@sort, \cmd\NAT@cmprs, and the new
% \cmd\NAT@merge. Henceforth, we require that this later version be used.
%
% For other \classname{natbib} customizations, you may proceed as if you were going to use
% the \file{natbib.cfg} file: anything that you can modify by this means is fair game.
% Once \revtex\ is finished loading, you can assert any definitions for \classname{natbib} that you wish.
%
% \begin{macro}{\rev@citet}
% \begin{macro}{\rev@citealp}
% \begin{macro}{\rev@citealpnum}
% We define variants on \classname{natbib}'s commands \cmd\citet, \cmd\citealp, and \cmd\citealpnum. 
% \cmd\rev@citealpnum\ uses a numerical citation.
% \cmd\rev@citealp\ and \cmd\rev@citealpnum\ are the aliases of \cmd\onlinecite,
% \cmd\rev@citet\ that of \cmd\textcite.
% 
% In each case, we invoke \cmd\rtx@swap@citea\ to effect different productions between 
% multiple arguments to the \cmd\cite\ command.
%
% \cmd\rev@citealpnum\ provides textual citations where superscript citations are the default.
% These should be accessible via the \cmd\citet\ command.
%
% Therefore we remember how to do a numerical citation
% even when the superscript citation has been selected.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\DeclareRobustCommand
\expandafter\rev@citet
\expandafter{%
 \expandafter\begingroup
  \expandafter\rtx@swap@citea
  \expandafter\g@bblefirsttoken
              \csname citet \endcsname
}%
\expandafter\DeclareRobustCommand
\expandafter\rev@citealp
\expandafter{%
 \expandafter\begingroup
  \expandafter\rtx@swap@citea
  \expandafter\g@bblefirsttoken
              \csname citealp \endcsname
}%
\expandafter\DeclareRobustCommand
\expandafter\rev@citealpnum
\expandafter{%
 \expandafter\begingroup
  \expandafter\rtx@swap@citenum
  \expandafter\g@bblefirsttoken
              \csname citealp \endcsname
}%
\def\rtx@swap@citenum{%
  \rtx@swap@citea
  \let\@cite\NAT@citenum
  \let\NAT@mbox\mbox
  \let\citeyear\NAT@citeyear
  \let\NAT@space\NAT@spacechar
}%
\def\g@bblefirsttoken{%
 \expandafter\true@sw
 \expandafter\@empty
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\rtx@citesuper}
% We prepare to redefine \classname{natbib}'s procedure \cmd\NAT@citesuper,
% which is executed when setting a superscript citation.
% The \cmd\hspace\ is removed: in any case, it
% should really be \cmd\hspace*, to prevent an unwanted pagebreak.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\rtx@citesuper[3]{%
 \ifNAT@swa
  \leavevmode
  \unskip
% \hspace{1\p@}%
  \textsuperscript{\normalfont#1}%
  \if*#3*\else\ (#3)\fi
 \else
  #1%
 \fi
 \endgroup
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@makefnmark@cite}
% We define a procedure that will set a footnote mark the same way that
% a citation is set. If footnotes are put in the bibliography with
% \cmd\footinbib@sw, then the corresponding mark should look the same
% as the result of a \cmd\cite. This is how we do it.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@makefnmark@cite{\begingroup\NAT@swatrue\@cite{{\@thefnmark}}{}{}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\rtx@bibsection}
% Prepare to override \classname{natbib}'s definition of \cmd\bibsection.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\rtx@bibsection{%
 \@ifx@empty\refname{%
  \par
 }{%
% \let\@hangfroms@section\@hang@froms
  \expandafter\section\expandafter*\expandafter{\refname}%
  \@nobreaktrue
 }%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\rtx@swap@citea}
% \begin{macro}{\rtx@def@citea}
% \begin{macro}{\rtx@def@citea@close}
% \begin{macro}{\rtx@def@citea@box}
% The procedures |\rtx@def@citea|, |\rtx@def@citea@close|, and |\rtx@def@citea@box| 
% can take over the management of \classname{natbib}'s |\@citea| macro to effect more sophisticated
% behavior of the punctuation between textual citations. The switch is performed by \cmd\rtx@swap@citea.
%
% \changes{4.1j}{2009/10/25}{(AO, 552) Repair spacing in \cs{onlinecite}}
% In these procedures, we use \cmd\count@\ to count the number of arguments of the \cmd\cite\ command,
% and we use \cmd\c@NAT@ctr\ to keep track of which argument we are processing.
% The latter counter is created by \classname{natbib} and used there solely in bibliography processing,
% where it keeps track of the reference number. 
% We take over its use in these macros, but only locally; therefore these procedures should work properly, even within the bibliography.
%FIXME: check whether this is true!
%
% Because we are using a scratch counter \cmd\count@, we are vulnerable to other \TeX\ programmers
% who patch in to \classname{natbib}'s processing and who might use that counter at the same time we are doing so.
% This is a potential source of trouble for us. 
%FIXME: store the value of \cmd\count@\ in a private \cmd\csname!
%
% Note that \cmd\rtx@def@citea\ begins the same as \cmd\NAT@def@citea, which it replaces, 
% then makes further decisions based on the values of the counters. 
%
% Note also that, in \classname{natbib}, the replacement part of \cmd\NAT@def@citea@close\ could be rewritten as
% \cmd\NAT@def@citea\cmd\prepdef\cmd\@citea\verb+{+\cmd\NAT@@close\verb+}+, which 
% would them obviate the need for us to override its meaning. 
%
% Note, too, the effect of \cmd\rtx@def@citea@box, which replaces \cmd\NAT@def@citea@box,
% is almost the same as the latter, except the entire \cmd\@citea\ is given as the argument
% of \cmd\NAT@mbox.
%
% Finally, bear in mind that the English (and some American editors) do not place a comma
% before the ``and''; our procedures do (but they could be rewritten with that convention). 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\rtx@swap@citea{%
 \let\NAT@def@citea\rtx@def@citea
 \let\NAT@def@citea@close\rtx@def@citea@close
 \let\NAT@def@citea@box\rtx@def@citea@box
}%
\def\rtx@def@citea{%
 \def\@citea{\NAT@separator\NAT@space}%
 \advance\c@NAT@ctr\@ne
 \@ifnum{\count@>\tw@}{%
  \@ifnum{\c@NAT@ctr=\count@}{\appdef\@citea{\NAT@conj\NAT@space}}{}%
 }{%
  \def\@citea{\NAT@space\NAT@conj\NAT@space}%
 }%
}%
\def\rtx@def@citea@close{%
 \rtx@def@citea
 \prepdef\@citea{\NAT@@close}%
}%
\def\rtx@def@citea@box{%
 \rtx@def@citea@close
 \expandafter\def\expandafter\@citea\expandafter{\expandafter\NAT@mbox\expandafter{\@citea}}%
}%
\def\NAT@conj{and}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\BibitemShut}
% \begin{macro}{\bibAnnote}
% \changes{4.1j}{2009/10/24}{(AO, 549) Repairing natbib's \cs{BibitemShut} and \cs{bibAnnote}}
% \changes{4.1o}{2010/02/05}{(AO, 549) Remove patch to natbib, which is now at version 8.31a}
% \changes{4.1o}{2010/02/07}{(AO, 578) accommodate the possible space character preceding \cs{BibitemShut}.} 
% We remember a temporary patch to \classname{natbib}'s definition of \cmd\BibitemShut.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\NAT@BibitemShut#1{%
 \def\@bibstop{#1}%
 \let\bibitem@Stop\bibitemStop
 \let\bibitem@NoStop\bibitemNoStop
 \@ifx{\bibitemShut\relax}{\let\@bibitemShut\@empty}{%
  \expandafter\def\expandafter\@bibitemShut\expandafter{\bibitemShut}%
 }%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% The following is a bug fix to \classname{natbib} version 8.31b.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\BibitemShut@ltx#1{%
 \unskip
 \def\@bibstop{#1}%
 \let\bibitem@Stop\bibitemStop
 \let\bibitem@NoStop\bibitemNoStop
 \@ifx{\bibitemShut\relax}{\let\@bibitemShut\@empty}{%
  \expandafter\def\expandafter\@bibitemShut\expandafter{\bibitemShut}%
 }%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{verbatim}
%\providecommand{\bibAnnote}[3]{%
%  \BibitemShut{#1}%
%  \def\@tempa{#3}\@ifx{\@tempa\@empty}{}{%
%   \begin{quotation}\noindent
%    \textsc{Key:}\ #2\\\textsc{Annotation:}\ \@tempa
%   \end{quotation}%
%  }%
%  \ignorespaces
%}%
%\def\@bibitemShut{}%
%    \end{verbatim}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{thebibliography}{}{}%
\let\@listi\@empty
\appdef\rtx@require@packages{%
 \RequirePackage[sort&compress]{natbib}[2009/11/07 8.31a (PWD, AO)]%
 \let@environment{NAT@thebibliography}{thebibliography}%
 \let@environment{thebibliography}{rtx@thebibliography}%
 \let\bibliographystyle@latex\bibliographystyle
 \let\NAT@citesuper\rtx@citesuper
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\NAT@bibsetnum}
% \begin{macro}{\NAT@bibsetup}
% \begin{macro}{\bibpreamble}
% \begin{macro}{\newblock}
% \begin{macro}{\bibnumfmt}
% \begin{macro}{\NAT@merge}
% We define the sectioning command to use when starting the bibliography
% and gently coax \classname{natbib} into using
% the formatting procedures that \emph{we} want it to use.
%
% This way of setting up \env{thebibliography} 
% automatically sets the label width based on
% the largest number used within the bibliography.
% This scheme will not work properly using the
% author/year style of bib entry, though.
%
% We define \cmd\bibnumfmt\ to be \cmd\place@bibnumber, which is a macro
% managed by \revtex. If the document defines \cmd\bibnumfmt, then that
% definition will be used instead, which is what the \classname{natbib}
% package gives as its programming interface.
%
% We set \cmd\NAT@merge\ to \cmd\tw@, which turns on \classname{natbib}'s
% \classname{mcite} capabilities. This is the default setting. 
% If numerical citations are not to be used, then \cmd\NAT@merge\ 
% should be set to \cmd\@ne\ (syntax is still enabled, but semantics are turned off). 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\bibsection\rtx@bibsection
\let\NATx@bibsetnum\NAT@bibsetnum
\def\NAT@bibsetnum#1{%
 \setlength{\topsep}{\z@}%
 \NATx@bibsetnum{\ref{LastBibItem}}%
}%
\let\NATx@bibsetup\NAT@bibsetup
\def\NAT@bibsetup{%
 \setlength{\labelwidth}{\z@}%
 \setlength{\labelsep}{\z@}%
 \setlength{\itemindent}{\z@}%
 \setlength{\listparindent}{\z@}%
 \setlength{\topsep}{\z@}%
 \setlength{\parsep}{\z@}%
 \NATx@bibsetup
}%
\let\bibpreamble\@empty
\def\newblock{\ }%
\let\NATx@bibnumfmt\bibnumfmt
\def\bibnumfmt{\place@bibnumber}%
\let\NAT@merge\thr@@
\let\NAT@citeyear\citeyear
\let\onlinecite\rev@citealp
\let\textcite\rev@citet
%    \end{macrocode}
% The following is needed until \classname{natbib} is at 8.31b.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@ifx{\BibitemShut\NAT@BibitemShut}{%
 \class@info{Repairing natbib's \string\BibitemShut}%
 \let\BibitemShut\BibitemShut@ltx
}{}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\bibliographystyle}
% \changes{4.1q}{2010/04/01}{(AO, 586) When .bbl is pasted into the document, prevent automatic bibliography inclusion.}%
% \changes{4.1q}{2010/04/13}{(AO, 588) Only write \revtex-specific BibTeX .bib data if the .bst style is set by REVTeX.}%
% We arrange for the selection of bibliography style
% to occur either due to the document's explicit
% \cmd\bibliographystyle\ statement or
% via the journal substyle.
%
% Note that \revtex\ is incompatible with 
% any package that patches \cmd\bibliographystyle.
% Since \classname{natbib} does this, we need a fix.
%
% The Boolean \cmd\bibliographystyle@sw\ signifies that the document  contains explicit
% \cmd\bibliographystyle\ markup. If, on the contrary, the bibliography style is set by
% the the society or the journal, then no explicit \cmd\bibliographystyle\ command appears in the document instance.
% In this case \cmd\bibliographystyle@sw\ will be \cmd\false@sw.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\bibliographystyle@latex\bibliographystyle
\def\bibliographystyle{\@booleantrue\bibliographystyle@sw\def\@bibstyle}%
\@booleanfalse\bibliographystyle@sw
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \changes{4.1j}{2009/11/03}{(AO, 551) Punctuation at end of reference when optional arguments to the cite key are given.}
% The following had been bug fixes to \classname{natbib} version 8.31a.
%    \begin{verbatim}
%\def\bibitemStop{\@bibitemShut}%
%\def\NAT@bibitem@cont{%
% \let\bibitem@Stop\bibitemContinue
% \let\bibitem@NoStop\bibitemContinue
%}%
%    \end{verbatim}
% The following are alterations to \classname{natbib} version 8.31a to 
% accommodate the possible space character preceding \cmd\BibitemShut,
% and to handle the case of merged references, where the first ends with a stop character. 
% \changes{4.1o}{2010/02/07}{(AO, 578) accommodate the possible space character preceding \cs{BibitemShut}.} 
% \changes{4.1o}{2010/02/09}{(AO, 581) Handle case: merged references, with first ending in a stop character.} 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\NAT@bibitem@cont{%
 \let\bibitem@Stop\bibitemContinue@Stop
 \let\bibitem@NoStop\bibitemContinue
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\bibitemNoStop{%
 \@ifx@empty\@bibitemShut{.\spacefactor\@mmm\space}{\@bibitemShut}%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\bibitemContinue{%
 \@ifx@empty\@bibitemShut{;\spacefactor\@mmm\space}{\@bibitemShut}%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\bibitemContinue@Stop{%
 \@ifx@empty\@bibitemShut{\spacefactor\@mmm\space}{\@bibitemShut}%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \changes{4.1k}{2009/11/11}{(AO, 561) remove dead code relating to \cs{bibitemContinue}} 
% We used to customize one of the productions of \classname{natbib}, but no longer.
%    \begin{verbatim}
%\let\bibitemContinue\bibitemContinue@rtx
%    \end{verbatim}
%
% Here ends the code to be executed at \cmd\rtx@require@packages\ time.
%    \begin{macrocode}
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/07}{(AO, 516) Merged references are separated with a semicolon}
% Redefine a macro of \classname{natbib} so that merged references are separated with a semicolon.
% \changes{4.1k}{2009/11/11}{(AO, 561) remove dead code relating to \cs{bibitemContinue}} 
%    \begin{verbatim}
% \def\bibitemContinue@rtx{;\spacefactor\@mmm\space}%
%    \end{verbatim}
%
% \begin{macro}{\onlinecite}
% \begin{macro}{\textcite}
% We extend \classname{natbib}'s syntax with two commands to set a citation
% on the baseline (as opposed to superscripted) and as text (rather than parenthetical), respectively.
% A journal substyle that makes citations be superscripted or parenthetical as the case may be, should ensure
% that the author has continued access to these two styles. 
%
% Note that the society or journal substyle override the meanings of \cmd\@onlinecite\ or
% \cmd\@textcite\ given here.
% 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand\onlinecite{\@onlinecite}%
\DeclareRobustCommand\textcite{\@textcite}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\bibliography}
% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 457) Endnotes to be sorted in with numerical citations.}%
% Provide a hook for supplying Bib\TeX\ a bibliographic database that may contain, say, 
% footnotes.
% 
% Note that Bib\TeX\ chokes if the argument of the \cmd\bibdata\ command has null fields,
% hence these tests.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\bibliography@latex\bibliography
\def\bibliography#1{%
 \auto@bib@empty
 \begingroup
  \let\auto@bib@innerbib\@empty
  \@ifx@empty{\pre@bibdata}{%
   \bibliography@latex{#1}%
  }{%
   \@if@empty{#1}{%
    \expandafter\bibliography@latex\expandafter{\pre@bibdata}%
   }{%
    \expandafter\bibliography@latex\expandafter{\pre@bibdata,#1}%
   }%
  }%
 \endgroup
}%
\let\pre@bibdata\@empty
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{environment}{rtx@thebibliography}%
% \begin{macro}{\present@bibnote}%
% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/11}{(AO, 521) Lonely bibliography head}%
% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 572) Independent footnote counter for title block. Abstract footnote counter shared with body.}%
% \changes{4.1o}{2010/02/02}{(AO, 575) Automatically incorporate the (Bib\TeX-generated) .bbl into an explicit \env{thebibliography}}%
% \changes{4.1q}{2010/04/01}{(AO, 586) When .bbl is pasted into the document, prevent automatic bibliography inclusion.}%
% We put a tail patch into \cmd\thebibliogrphy\ and
% a headpatch into \cmd\endthebibliography.
%
% Here we provide a default treatment for frontmatter notes 
% deferred to the bibliography; a journal substyle 
% might want to override the definition of \cmd\present@bibnote.
%
% We make provisions for the case where there are no \cmd\bibitem s 
% for the bibliography: we produce no bibliography head at all.
% 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{rtx@thebibliography}[1]{%
 \NAT@thebibliography{#1}%
 \let\@TBN@opr\present@bibnote
 \@FMN@list
}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% The following line was commented out:
%    \begin{verbatim}
%\@endnotesinbib
%    \end{verbatim}
% The \cmd\auto@bib@innerbib\ directive has been moved from the begin processing to the end processing.
% This means that the content of the \env{thebibliography} environment can itself prevent the 
% automatic reading in of the .bbl file. This would be needed when the user has pasted in the 
% content of the .bbl file into the document itself, something required by APS and AIP editorial direction.
%    \begin{macrocode}
 \auto@bib@innerbib
 \edef\@currentlabel{\arabic{NAT@ctr}}%
 \label{LastBibItem}%
 \endNAT@thebibliography
 \aftergroup\auto@bib@empty
}%
\def\present@bibnote#1#2{%
 \item[%
  \textsuperscript{%
   \normalfont
   \Hy@raisedlink{\hyper@anchorstart{frontmatter.#1}\hyper@anchorend}%
   \begingroup
    \csname c@\@mpfn\endcsname#1\relax
    \frontmatter@thefootnote
   \endgroup
  }%
 ]#2\par
%    \end{macrocode}
% The following line was commented out:
%    \begin{verbatim}
%\global\let\NAT@bibitem@first@sw\@secondoftwo
%    \end{verbatim}
%    \begin{macrocode}
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{macro}{write@bibliographystyle}
% \changes{4.1q}{2010/04/13}{(AO, 588) Only write \revtex-specific BibTeX .bib data if the .bst style is set by REVTeX.}%
% We wish to delay committing the \cmd\bibliographystyle\ until as late as possible.
% The journal substyle will define a default bibliography style, and 
% the document's explicit \cmd\bibliographystyle\ command, if any, will override that default.
%
% The \cmd\bibstyle\ command is allowed appear quite late in the \file{.aux} file. 
% We now delay the automatic writing of the \cmd\bibstyle\ command to the end of the job.
%
% The procedure \cmd\write@bibliographystyle\ tests whether a \cmd\bibliographystyle\ command has 
% already been given.
% If not, it effectively executes the needed \cmd\bibliographystyle\ command, then neutralizes itself
% (we only need to do this once per job).
%
% If the document lacks explicit \cmd\bibliographystyle\ markup, we execute
% \cmd\@bibdataout@rev, a hook for \revtex-aware processing. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\write@bibliographystyle{%
 \@ifxundefined\@bibstyle{}{%
  \expandafter\bibliographystyle@latex\expandafter{\@bibstyle}%
  \bibliographystyle@sw{}{\@bibdataout@rev}%
 }%
 \global\let\write@bibliographystyle\relax
}%
\AtEndDocument{\write@bibliographystyle}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\rtx@@citetp}
% \begin{macro}{\rtx@citex}
% \begin{macro}{\super@cite@let}
% \begin{macro}{\super@cite@end}
% \begin{macro}{\super@cite@swap}
% We wish to extend \classname{natbib} to move spaces and citations around
% a superscript-style citation, imitating Donald Arseneau's \classname{cite} package
% with the \classoption{super}.
%
% The \cmd\rtx@@citetp\ procedure is substituted for \cmd\NAT@@citetp;
% it then calls the \cmd\rtx@citex\ procedure and implements the features of the
% \classoption{citeautoscript} class option.
% In the end, \cmd\@citex\ is called with its customary parameters. 
%
% The document should be marked up as if citations were \emph{not} superscripted,
% and then if you select a journal substyle that has superscripted citations, \revtex\ will do its best
% to alter the formatting of the \cmd\cite s to accomodate superscript style.
%
% Only citations set as superscript are affected by this procedure,
% because we check \cmd\@cite\ against \cmd\NAT@citesuper. 
%
% Here's a subtle point: when is the argument of \cmd\super@cite@swap\ not the same as the token \cmd\@let@token?
% Answer: when the latter is \cmd\@sptoken! This case has to be handled separately.
% 
% Note that whether a punctuation is movable is determined by the definition
% of a particular control sequence name.
% A society or journal can alter things: to remove a character from the set,
% do, say, \cmd\expandafter \cmd\let \cmd\csname \texttt{rtx@automove;} \cmd\endcsname \cmd\relax.
% To add a character to the set, do, say, \cmd\expandafter \cmd\let \cmd\csname \texttt{rtx@automove;} \cmd\endcsname \cmd\@empty.
%
% Implementation note: due to a \TeX\ peculiarity, we have to check for the case
% where \cmd\@let@token\ is a space token \emph{before} we parse forward.
% At issue is the corner case where an end of file is at hand. If we 
% were to let \cmd\super@cite@swap\ parse forward, we would encounter a \TeX\ end-of-file
% error. Note that the test will be true in many distinct cases:
% the file ends, the next character is a line terminator, the next character is a space.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\rtx@@citetp[#1]{\@ifnextchar[{\rtx@citex[#1]}{\rtx@citex[][#1]}}%
\def\rtx@citex[#1][#2]#3{%
 \begingroup
  \def\@tempa{[#1][#2]{#3}}%
  \@ifx{\@cite\NAT@citesuper}{%
   \leavevmode
   \skip@\lastskip
   \unskip
   \super@cite@let
  }{%
   \super@cite@end
  }%
}%
\def\super@cite@let{%
 \futurelet\@let@token\super@cite@check
}%
\def\super@cite@end{%
 \aftergroup\@citex\expandafter\endgroup\@tempa
}%
\def\super@cite@check{%
 \@ifx{\@let@token\@sptoken}{%
  \super@cite@end
 }{%
  \super@cite@swap
 }%
}%
\long\def\super@cite@swap#1{%
 \expandafter\@ifx\expandafter{\csname rtx@automove#1\endcsname\@empty}{%
  #1%
  \super@cite@let
 }{%
  \super@cite@end
  #1%
 }%
}%
\expandafter\let\csname rtx@automove.\endcsname\@empty
\expandafter\let\csname rtx@automove,\endcsname\@empty
\expandafter\let\csname rtx@automove:\endcsname\@empty
\expandafter\let\csname rtx@automove;\endcsname\@empty
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% The following must execute only after \classname{natbib} is loaded and has set
% up its parameters (which it does at \cmd\AtBeginDocument\ time).
% If superscript citations have been selected, and 
% if the \classoption{citeautoscript} class option has been selected, 
% we patch into \classname{natbib}'s mechanism to migrate punctuation around the 
% citation, as in class \classname{cite} with the \classoption{superscript} option.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\appdef\class@documenthook{%
 \citeautoscript@sw{%
  \@ifx{\@cite\NAT@citesuper}{%
   \let\NAT@@citetp\rtx@@citetp
  }{}%
 }{}%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% Resolve an incompatability between \classname{natbib} and \classname{listings}.
% The latter package tests \cmd\chapter (which has now been \cmd\let\ to \cmd\relax\ as a side effect \classname{natbib}'s use of \LaTeX's \cmd\@ifundefined).
%
% We couch our fix in such terms that will not be disruptive if \cmd\chapter\ is actually defined at this point.
%
% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) No longer need to test \cs{chapter} as of \texttt{natbib} version 8.2}
%    \begin{verbatim}
%\@ifx{\chapter\relax}{\let\chapter\@undefined}{}%
%    \end{verbatim}
%
%
% \subsubsection{\cs{endnote}s and \cs{rtx@bibnote}s}
%
% \begin{macro}{\mini@note}
% \begin{macro}{\save@note}
% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 572) Independent footnote counter for title block. Abstract footnote counter shared with body.}%
% QUERY: how do footnotes get thrown to the bibliography. \cmd\footinbib@sw\ appears to be irrelevant. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\mini@note{\save@note\mini@notes}%Implicit #2
\def\save@note#1#2{%
  \stepcounter\@mpfn
  \protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\thempfn}%
  \@footnotemark
  \expandafter\g@addto@macro
  \expandafter#1%
  \expandafter{%
  \expandafter \@@footnotetext
  \expandafter {\@thefnmark}{#2}%
              }%
}%
\long\def\@@footnotetext#1{\def\@thefnmark{#1}\@footnotetext}%
\let\mini@notes\@empty
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\endnote}
% A version of footnote that appears in the bibliography, or where \cmd\printendnotes\ appears.
%    \begin{verbatim}
%\def\@endnote{%
% \begingroup
%  \aftergroup\@footnotemark
%  \aftergroup\@endnotetext
%  \@ifnextchar[{%
%   \@xendnote
%  }{%
%   \stepcounter{footnote}%
%   \protected@xdef\@tempa{\thefootnote}%
%   \expandafter\@xendnote\expandafter[\the\c@footnote]%
% }%
%}%
%    \end{verbatim}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@xendnote}
% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 457) Endnotes to be sorted in with numerical citations.}%
% \begin{verbatim}
%\def\unused@xendnote[#1]{%
%  \begingroup
%   \c@footnote#1\relax
%    \end{macrocode}
% New for 4.1
%    \begin{macrocode}
%   \unrestored@protected@xdef\@endnotelabel{Note\thefootnote}%
%   \authoryear@sw{%
%    \unrestored@protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\noexpand\ref{\@endnotelabel}}%
%   }{%
%    \unrestored@protected@xdef\@thefnmark{\@endnotelabel}%
%   }%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Was:
% \unrestored@protected@xdef\@thefnmark{endnote\thefootnote}%
% End 4.1 changes
%    \begin{macrocode}
%  \endgroup
% \endgroup
%}%
%\def\@endnotemark{%
% \expandafter\cite\expandafter{\@thefnmark}%
%}%
% \end{verbatim}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\rev@citemark#1{%
 \expandafter\cite\expandafter{\@thefnmark}%
}%
\def\rev@endtext#1{%
 \let\@endnotelabel\@thefnmark
 \@endnotetext
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\endnote@ext}
% \begin{macro}{\bibdata@app}
% \begin{macro}{\bibdata@ext}
% The macro \cmd\endnote@ext\ is the file extension for the auxiliary file holding footnotes.
% The \cmd\bibdata@app\ and \cmd\bibdata@ext\ macros are used to form the name of a
% Bib\TeX\ database file holding footnotes.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\endnote@ext{.end}%
\def\bibdata@app{Notes}%
\def\bibdata@ext{bib}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@endnotetext}
% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 457) Endnotes to be sorted in with numerical citations.}%
% The procedure \cmd\@endnotetext\ writes a Bib\TeX\ .bib file for the purpose
% of insering a footnote into the (numbered, unsorted) bibliography.
%
% We need to define \cmd\pre@bibdata\ to be 
% \cmd\jobname\cmd\endnote@ext, and we probably should define \cmd\endnote@ext\ to 
% be something like ``Notes.bib''.
%
% In each case, the material to be written out requires robustification, provided by \cmd\endnote@relax.
% The commands \cmd\label, \cmd\index, and \cmd\glossary,
% which are robustified for \cmd\markright\ and \cmd\addcontentsline,
% are likewise robustified here.
%
% Procedure \cmd\@endnotetext@note\ is the alias for \cmd\@endnotetext\ when the endnotes are to be
% processed separately from the bibliography (generally true when citations are not sorted).
%    \begin{verbatim}
%\long\def\unused@endnotetext@note#1{%
%  \@ifxundefined\@endnoteout{%
%    \newwrite\@endnoteout
%    \gdef\endnote@stream{\jobname\endnote@ext}%
%    \immediate\openout\@endnoteout\endnote@stream\relax
%  }{}%
%  \begingroup
%    \endnote@relax
%    \immediate\write\@endnoteout{\string\@doendnote{\@endnotelabel}{#1}}%
%  \endgroup
%}%
%    \end{verbatim}
%
% \cmd\@doendnote\ is obsolete.
%    \begin{verbatim}
%\def\@doendnote#1#2{\bibitem{#1}#2}%
%    \end{verbatim}
%
% \changes{4.1o}{2010/02/05}{(AO, 579) Endnote shall comprise their own Bib\TeX\ entry type: @FOOTNOTE.} 
% Procedure \cmd\@endnotetext\ is the operative procedure\ when the endnotes are to be
% collated in with the other references, typically true when numerical citations are being used.
% The technique involves writing a .bib file (\cmd\@bibdataout) with each endnote typed as 
% a \texttt{@FOOTNOTE} entry. 
%
% Timing note: doing \cmd\openout\ should be deferred until the beginning of the document,
% as is done here. This allows one to make a format (\filename{.fmt}) file out of this class.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\@endnotetext#1{%
  \begingroup
    \endnote@relax
    \immediate\write\@bibdataout{%
     @FOOTNOTE{%
      \@endnotelabel,%
%    \end{macrocode}
% The \texttt{key} field is recommended in cases where there is no author (see \filename{btxdoc}).
%    \begin{macrocode}
      key="\@endnotelabel",%
%    \end{macrocode}
% The \texttt{note} field is simply the content of the footnote.
%    \begin{macrocode}
      note="#1"%
     }%
    }%
  \endgroup
}%
\newwrite\@bibdataout
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\endnote@relax}
% At \cmd\AtBeginDocument\ time, we open the job's \filename{.bib} file.
%
% Procedure \cmd\endnote@relax\ robustifies commands that ought not to be expanded when
% the endnote is written out.
% Note the similarity between \cmd\endnote@relax\ and  \cmd\protected@write.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\endnote@relax{%
 \let\label\relax \let\index\relax \let\glossary\relax
 \let\cite \relax \let\ref  \relax \let\pageref \relax
 \let\(    \relax \let\)    \relax \let\\       \relax
 \let~\relax
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{verbatim}
%\let\protect\noexpand
%    \end{verbatim}
%    \begin{macrocode}
 \let \protect \@unexpandable@protect
 \newlinechar`\^^M%
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{verbatim}
%\newlinechar`\ %
%    \end{verbatim}
%    \begin{macrocode}
 \let\begin\relax \let\end\relax
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@bibdataout@init}
% \begin{macro}{\@bibdataout@aps}
% \changes{4.1o}{2010/02/10}{(AO, 580) Provide a document class option to turn off production of eprint field in bibliography.} 
% \changes{4.1o}{2010/02/12}{(AO, 580) Control .bst at run time.}%
% \changes{4.1q}{2010/04/13}{(AO, 588) Only write \revtex-specific BibTeX .bib data if the .bst style is set by REVTeX.}%
%\changes{4.2b}{2018/12/26}{(MD) Improve control over display of e-print ids in bibliography.}%
% At \cmd\AtBeginDocument\ time, we open the job's \filename{.bib} file.
% The hook is available for use by a society to place its own @CONTROL record in the \cmd\@bibdataout\ stream.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\appdef\class@documenthook{\@bibdataout@init}%
\def\@bibdataout@init{%
 \immediate\openout\@bibdataout\pre@bibdata.\bibdata@ext\relax
}%
\def\@bibdataout@rev{%
 \immediate\write\@bibdataout{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% The entry that controls processing of the \filename{.bst} file has entry type \texttt{@CONTROL}. 
% The citation key (REVTEX42Control) is effectively a version number,
% which the \filename{.bst} can use to interpret the bib entry.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  @CONTROL{%
   REVTEX42Control%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Say if we want the \texttt{eprint} field disabled. Otherwise accept the default of the \filename{.bst}. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
   \eprint@enable@sw{}{,eprint="1"}%
  }%
 }%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Place a \cmd\citation\ into the auxiliary file corresponding to this entry. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
 \if@filesw
  \immediate\write\@auxout{\string\citation{REVTEX42Control}}%
 \fi
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\printendnotes}
% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/10}{(AO, 520) Automatically produce \cs{bibliography} command when needed}%
% We have removed the endnotes facility from REVTeX, so the \cmd\printendnotes\ command now does nothing.
%
% Moving footnotes to the bibliogrphy is now accomplished through 
% the automatic generation of a job BiB\TeX\ database (called \cmd\pre@bibdata) containing the footnotes.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\printendnotes{%
 \class@warn{The \string\printendnotes\space command no longer serves any function. Please remove it from your document.}%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@endnotesinbib}
% \begin{macro}{\@endnotesinbibliography}
% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 457) Endnotes to be sorted in with numerical citations.}%
% We define a function \cmd\@endnotesinbib,
% and a variant \cmd\@endnotesinbibliography.
% The former is invoked at the start of 
% the end processing for \enve{thebibliography};
% the latter is a synonym.
%
% The procedure typesets the footnotes that are to 
% appear in the bibliography; the default is to
% simply arrange for the footnote counter to be
% reset at the start of the document.
%
% Note that this code make the assumption that 
% the counter used in \env{thebibliography} is \cmd\c@NAT@ctr.
% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/10}{(AO, 520) Automatically produce \cs{bibliography} command when needed}%
%
% Here is the sole place where \cmd\footinbib@sw\ has an effect, other code simple assigning its value.
% If it is false, or \cmd\authoryear@sw\ is true, then footnotes are handled by the default mechanism.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\make@footnote@endnote{%
 \footinbib@sw{%
  \authoryear@sw{}{%
   \ltx@footnote@push
   \def\thempfn{Note\thefootnote}%
   \let\ltx@footmark\rev@citemark
   \let\ltx@foottext\rev@endtext
%    \end{macrocode}
% The endnotes facility has been removed. 
% Also, there is no need to queue up \cmd\auto@bib\ here, since it is always queued up elsewhere. 
% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/10}{(AO, 520) Automatically produce \cs{bibliography} command when needed}%
%    \begin{verbatim}
%  \appdef\class@enddocumenthook{\auto@bib}%
%  \let\printendnotes\relax
%    \end{verbatim}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  }%
 }{}%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\ltx@footnote@push{%
 \let\ltx@footmark@latex\ltx@footmark
 \let\ltx@foottext@latex\ltx@foottext
 \let\thempfn@latex\thempfn
 \def\ltx@footnote@pop{%
  \let\ltx@footmark\ltx@footmark@latex
  \let\ltx@foottext\ltx@foottext@latex
  \let\thempfn\thempfn@latex
 }%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% The switchover to setting footnotes in the bibliography
% changes the meaning of \cmd\footnote\ and
% substitutes the synonym for \cmd\@endnotesinbib. 
%
% We arrange for the procedure \cmd\make@footnote@endnote\ to be executed
% at \cmd\class@documenthook\ time (we mustn't do this earlier because
% the meaning of \cmd\@footnotemark\ must not be changed before then, 
% for the sake of \file{ltxutil.dtx}).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\appdef\class@documenthook{%
 \make@footnote@endnote
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\auto@bib}
% \begin{macro}{\auto@bib@empty}
% \begin{macro}{\test@bbl@sw}
% \begin{macro}{\bibitem@set}
% \begin{macro}{\auto@bib@innerbib}
% \begin{macro}{\thebibliography@nogroup}
% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/10}{(AO, 520) Automatically produce \cs{bibliography} command when needed}%
% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 572) Independent footnote counter for title block. Abstract footnote counter shared with body.}%
% \changes{4.1o}{2010/02/02}{(AO, 575) Automatically incorporate the (Bib\TeX-generated) .bbl into an explicit \env{thebibliography}}%
% Under some circumstances, we must typeset the bibliography automatically.
% If the document requires footnotes to be  set in the bibliography (effectively, class option \texttt{footinbib}), 
% or that frontmatter footnotes be set in the bibliography (effectively, class option \texttt{bibnotes}), 
% but contains no explicit \cmd\bibliography\ statement.
%
% Note that this facility is not able to work more than once per document.
% If multiple bibliographys are required (e.g., per article), it will be the responsibility of the journal style
% to restore \cmd\auto@bib\ to its original meaning so it can be re-invoked.
% 
% In procedure \cmd\auto@bib, we first test for the presence of frontmatter footnotes deferred to the bibliography.
% If none, we further test for the presence of \cmd\bibitem\ commands in the job's \filename{.bbl} file.
% If either condition is met, we ask for a bibliography. 
% We know that the document itself lacks a \cmd\bibliography\ statement, 
% so we know the argument of the \cmd\bibliography\ that we will issue.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\auto@bib{%
 \@ifx@empty\@FMN@list{%
  \footinbib@sw{%
   \@ifnum{\csname c@\@mpfn\endcsname>\z@}{%
    \true@sw
   }{%
    \test@bbl@sw
   }%
  }{%
   \test@bbl@sw
  }%
 }{%
  \true@sw
 }%
 {%
  \bibliography{}%
 }{}%
}%
\def\auto@bib@empty{%
 \let\auto@bib\@empty
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Testing the \filename{.bbl} file involves defanging all expected commands
% and processing that file inside a box register (that will be simply discarded).
% We provide a new meaning for the \cmd\bibitem\ command: it queues a Boolean.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\test@bbl@sw{%
 \setbox\z@\vbox\bgroup
  \let\providecommand\providecommand@j@nk
  \let\bibfield\@gobbletwo
  \let\bibinfo\@gobbletwo
  \let\translation\@gobble
  \let\BibitemOpen\@empty
  \let\bibitemStop\@empty
  \let\bibitemNoStop\@empty
  \let\EOS\@empty
  \let\BibitemShut\@gobble
  \let\bibAnnoteFile\@gobbletwo
  \let\bibAnnote\@gobblethree
  \let\textbf\@gobble
  \let\emph\@gobble
  \@booleanfalse\bibitem@sw
  \let\bibitem\bibitem@set
  \auto@bib@innerbib
  \bibitem@sw{\aftergroup\true@sw}{\aftergroup\false@sw}%
 \egroup
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% The \cmd\bibitem@set\ is an alias for \cmd\bibitem\ for the purpose of detecting a non-trivial bibliography.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand\bibitem@set[1][]{%
 \bibitem@sw{}{%
  \@booleantrue\bibitem@sw
  \aftergroup\@booleantrue\aftergroup\bibitem@sw
 }%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% The \cmd\auto@bib@innerbib\ procedure reads in the \filename{.bbl} file (if it exists)
% within a context where its \env{thebibliography} environment does nothing, not even establishing a group. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\auto@bib@innerbib{%
 \begingroup
  \let@environment{thebibliography}{thebibliography@nogroup}%
  \bibliography{}%
 \endgroup
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Environment \env{thebibliography@nogroup} is an alias of the \env{thebibliography} environment that cancels itself. 
% It assumes that it is called within a \env{thebibliography} environment. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\thebibliography@nogroup#1{%
 \endgroup
 \def\@currenvir{thebibliography}%
}%
\def\endthebibliography@nogroup{\begingroup}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% The following should be part of \filename{ltxutil}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\long\def \@gobblethree #1#2#3{}%
\def\providecommand@j@nk#1[#2]{%
 \@ifnum{#2=\z@}{\def\j@nk}{%
  \@ifnum{#2=\@ne}{\def\j@nk##1}{%
   \@ifnum{#2=\tw@}{\def\j@nk##1##2}{%
    \@ifnum{#2=\thr@@}{\def\j@nk##1##2##3}{%
    }%
   }%
  }%
 }%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \section{Initial setup}
% 
% The standard LaTeX document classes execute certain commands 
% that are best deferred until \cmd\class@documenthook\ time.
% Here, we effectively split \cmd\pagenumbering\ into two halves,
% with a default definition for \cmd\thepage
% and an initialization of \cmd\c@page\ at \cmd\class@documenthook\ time.
%
% The meaning of \cmd\thepage\ can be overridden by society, journal, or
% anywhere within the document pramble, and the counter itself will be 
% preset at the beginning of the document. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\thepage{\@arabic\c@page}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Defer assignment until \cs{AtBeginDocument} time.}
% Note that this code is executed at \cmd\setup@hook\ time 
% to allow for the possibility of overrides by packages like \classname{geometry}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\appdef\setup@hook{%
 \tabbingsep \labelsep
 \leftmargin\leftmargini
 \labelwidth\leftmargin\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
 \let\@listi\@listI
 \@listi
}%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%
% We ensure that the ``environment'' component mark (implemented by \file{ltxgrid.dtx}) 
% is initialized properly (via a hook, itself defined via \file{ltxutil.dtx}). 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\appdef\class@documenthook{%
 \global\c@page\@ne
 \def\curr@envir{document}%
 \mark@envir{\curr@envir}%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\open@onecolumn}%
% \begin{macro}{\open@column@two}%
% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Grid changes with ltxgrid}
% \changes{4.0d}{2000/04/10}{Also alter how lists get indented.}
% When setting the column grid, we have to override the procedure
% for formatting lists. 
% Because \cmd\twocolumngrid\ requires rebalancing columns at some points, 
% typesetting must employ only the manipulation of 
% \cmd\leftskip\ and \cmd\rightskip, and must avoid the use of
% \cmd\moveleft, \cmd\moveright, and \cmd\parshape. 
%
% It is one of the stranger features of \TeX\ that these two separate
% mechanisms exist. The latter three have the effect of adding things to the 
% Main Vertical List that cannot be removed and later added back with all their
% properties intact.
%
% In detail, \cmd\moveleft, say, adds a box to the MVL with
% its reference point shifted horizontally by some amount relative to the 
% reference point of the enclosing list. If that box is removed from the 
% MVL (via a \cmd\lastbox\ operation in the output routine), and later
% thrown back to the MVL, the shift of the box will have been ``forgotten'' by \TeX.
% This is a bug, but not one ``acceptible to D. E. Knuth'', so it will never be fixed. 
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\open@onecolumn{%
 \open@column@one\@ne
 \set@colht
 \@floatplacement
 \@dblfloatplacement
}%
\def\open@twocolumn{%
 \open@column@mlt\tw@
 \set@colht
 \@floatplacement
 \@dblfloatplacement
 \sloppy
 \let\set@listindent\set@listindent@
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \section{\cs{appendix}}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%\newif\ifappendixon
%    \end{macrocode}
% Note that, within appendices, 
% equations are numbered within sections (appendices).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\appendix{%
 \par
%\appendixontrue
 \setcounter{section}\z@
 \setcounter{subsection}\z@
 \setcounter{subsubsection}\z@
 \def\thesubsection{\arabic{subsection}}%
 \def\thesubsubsection{\alph{subsubsection}}%
 \@addtoreset{equation}{section}%
 \def\theequation@prefix{\thesection}%
 \addtocontents{toc}{\protect\appendix}%
 \@ifstar{%
  \def\thesection{\unskip}%
  \def\theequation@prefix{A.}%
 }{%
  \def\thesection{\Alph{section}}%
 }%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \section{Changing the page grid}
% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Define three separate environments, defer assignment to \cs{AtBeginDocument} time.}
%
% \subsection{Avoiding Grid Changes}%
%
% In preprint styles, ``wide text'' is a no-op, and the title page
% processing involves no grid change.
% 
% \begin{macro}{\title@column}%
% \begin{macro}{\close@column}%
% Provide default meanings for \cmd\title@column\ and \cmd\close@column,
% in case they were never defined. 
% Note that the society or journal substyle may define 
% \cmd\title@column\ or \cmd\close@column: this code will not override. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\title@column#1{%
 \minipagefootnote@init
 #1%
 \minipagefootnote@foot
}%
\def\close@column{%
 \newpage
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsection{Galley Style: Margin Changes}%
% A variant of preprint processing. Emulate journal appearance somewhat.
%
% \begin{environment}{widetext@galley}
% DPC: We're in galley style so do a lob sided display environment.
%
% QUERY: How can we be sure that we are in galley style?
% ANSWER: as noted elsewhere, require that both \cmd\twocolumn@sw\ and \cmd\preprintsty@sw\ be false.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\galley@outdent{\rightmargin-\columnwidth\advance\rightmargin-\columnsep}%
\let\widetext@outdent\@empty
\newenvironment{widetext@galley}{%
  \list{}{%
    \topsep        \z@skip
    \listparindent \parindent
    \itemindent    \parindent
    \leftmargin    \z@
    \parsep        \z@\@plus\p@
    \widetext@outdent
    \relax
  }%
  \item\relax
}{
  \endlist
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
%
% \subsection{Grid Changing Via \classname{ltxgrid}}%
%
% In case \classoption{twocolumngrid} has been invoked,
% switch column grid using the column grid-changing commands.
% Supply stub definitions of those commands here.
% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{grid changes with ltxgrid}
%
% \begin{macro}{\title@column@grid}%
% \begin{macro}{\close@column@grid}%
% The title block always starts at the top of a new page.
% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{grid changes with ltxgrid}
%
% Note that, for the procedure \cmd\close@column@grid,
% we balance columns by switching to the one-column page grid. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\title@column@grid#1{%
 \minipagefootnote@init
  \onecolumngrid
  \begingroup
   \let\@footnotetext\frontmatter@footnotetext
%<ignore>  \let\set@footnotewidth\set@footnotewidth@two
   \ltx@no@footnote
   #1%
  \endgroup
  \twocolumngrid
 \minipagefootnote@foot
}%
\def\close@column@grid{%
 \balancelastpage@sw{%
  \onecolumngrid
%<ignore>  \twocolumngrid
 }{}%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{environment}{widetext@grid}
% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{grid changes via ltxgrid procedures}
% \changes{4.0e}{2000/11/21}{adornments above and below.}
% \changes{4.1g}{2009/10/07}{(AO, 525) Remove phantom paragraph above display math that is given in vertical mode}%
% We slip into the one-column page grid
% within the scope of this environment.
%
% Note that we set adornments above and below the \env{widettext}.
% These are set as leaders, so they will disappear at a page break.
% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO) fine-tune spacing above and below widetext}%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{widetext@grid}{%
  \par\ignorespaces
  \setbox\widetext@top\vbox{%
%<ignore>  \vskip15\p@
   \hb@xt@\hsize{%
    \leaders\hrule\hfil
    \vrule\@height6\p@
   }%
%<ignore>  \vskip6\p@
  }%
  \setbox\widetext@bot\hb@xt@\hsize{%
    \vrule\@depth6\p@
    \leaders\hrule\hfil
  }%
  \onecolumngrid
  \vskip10\p@
  \dimen@\ht\widetext@top\advance\dimen@\dp\widetext@top
  \cleaders\box\widetext@top\vskip\dimen@
%<ignore> \let\set@footnotewidth\set@footnotewidth@two
  \vskip6\p@
  \prep@math@patch
}{%
  \par
  \vskip6\p@
  \setbox\widetext@bot\vbox{%
   \hb@xt@\hsize{\hfil\box\widetext@bot}%
%<ignore>  \vskip14\p@
  }%
  \dimen@\ht\widetext@bot\advance\dimen@\dp\widetext@bot
  \cleaders\box\widetext@bot\vskip\dimen@
  \vskip8.5\p@
  \twocolumngrid\global\@ignoretrue
  \@endpetrue
}%
\newbox\widetext@top
\newbox\widetext@bot
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
%
%
% Decide, finally, how the page grid is to be manipulated.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\set@page@grid{%
 \twocolumn@sw{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% The following two assignments determine what procedures are to be executed when 
% the footnote set width is calculated, and how footnotes are to be composed at the bottom of the page. 
% A society or journal wishing to do otherwise will override this code. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \let\set@footnotewidth\set@footnotewidth@two
  \let\compose@footnotes\compose@footnotes@two
  \let@environment{widetext}{widetext@grid}%
  \let\title@column\title@column@grid
  \let\close@column\close@column@grid
 }{%
  \let@environment{widetext}{widetext@galley}%
  \preprintsty@sw{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Change the page grid not at all.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  }{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% If we are galley style, change the page margin only.
%    \begin{macrocode}
   \galley@sw{%
    \let\widetext@outdent\galley@outdent
   }{}%
  }%
 }%
}%
\appdef\setup@hook{\set@page@grid}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \section{Old font commands}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOldFontCommand{\rm}{\normalfont\rmfamily}{\mathrm}
\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sf}{\normalfont\sffamily}{\mathsf}
\DeclareOldFontCommand{\tt}{\normalfont\ttfamily}{\mathtt}
\DeclareOldFontCommand{\bf}{\normalfont\bfseries}{\mathbf}
\DeclareOldFontCommand{\it}{\normalfont\itshape}{\mathit}
\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sl}{\normalfont\slshape}{\@nomath\sl}
\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sc}{\normalfont\scshape}{\@nomath\sc}
\DeclareRobustCommand*\cal{\@fontswitch\relax\mathcal}
\DeclareRobustCommand*\mit{\@fontswitch\relax\mathnormal}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \section{English-Language Texts}
% As this class is just for English language journals, we
% could hardwire these texts,
% but to make it easier to use this as a
% basis for the code for similar journal styles, separate out all the
% fixed text strings into babel-style macros of the form 
% |\|\ldots|name|
%
% Note: for babel compatability, use version 1999/05/05 v3.6x or later.
%
% Some of these might need changing in the society-specific code.
%
% \begin{macro}{\today}
% Procedure \cmd\today\ is used in the article class, but not in 
% this document class.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\today{\ifcase\month\or
  January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or
  July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or December\fi
  \space\number\day, \number\year}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\notesname}
% Text entity \cmd\notesname\ had been used in \cmd\printendnotes.
% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/10}{(AO, 520) Automatically produce \cs{bibliography} command when needed}%
% However, we have removed the endnotes facility from REVTeX.
% 
%    \begin{verbatim}
%\def\notesname{Notes}
%    \end{verbatim}
%    \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\partname}
% Text entity \cmd\partname\ is used in \cmd\@part.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\partname{Part}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\tocname}
% Text entity \cmd\tocname\ is used in \cmd\tableofcontents,
% as defined in the standard \LaTeX\ book class.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\tocname{Contents}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\lofname}
% Text entity \cmd\lofname\ is used in \cmd\listoffigures,
% as defined in the standard \LaTeX\ book class.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\lofname{List of Figures}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\lotname}
% Text entity \cmd\lotname\ is used in \cmd\listoftables,
% as defined in the standard \LaTeX\ book class.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\lotname{List of Tables}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\refname}
% Text entity \cmd\refname\ is used in \env{thebibliography}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\refname{References}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\indexname}
% Text entity \cmd\indexname\ is used in \env{theindex},
% as defined in the standard \LaTeX\ book class.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\indexname{Index}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\figurename}
% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Added localization of \cs{figuresname}}
% Text entity \cmd\figurename\ is used in \env{figure},
% \cmd\figuresname\ in \cmd\printfigures.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\figurename{FIG.}
\def\figuresname{Figures}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\tablename}
% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Added localization of \cs{tablesname}}
% Text entity \cmd\tablename\ is used in \env{table},
% \cmd\tablesname\ in \cmd\printtables.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\tablename{TABLE}
\def\tablesname{Tables}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\abstractname}
% Text entity \cmd\abstractname\ is used in \env{abstract}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\abstractname{Abstract}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\appendixesname}
% \begin{macro}{\appendixname}
% Text entity \cmd\appendixesname\ is used in TOC.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\appendixesname{Appendixes}%
\def\appendixname{Appendix}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\acknowledgmentsname}
% Text entity \cmd\acknowledgmentsname\ is used in \env{acknowledgments}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\acknowledgmentsname{Acknowledgments}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\journalname}
% This should be set by the society journal options, eg `pra'.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\journalname{??}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\copyrightname}
% Default layout does not assign copyright, but a journal that wants
% to might use this.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\copyrightname{??}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\andname}
% The text string ``and'' for use in author lists.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\andname{and}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@pacs@name}
% \begin{macro}{\@keys@name}
% The text string prepended to PACS numbers, resp. to keywords.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@pacs@name{PACS numbers: }%
\def\@keys@name{Keywords: }%
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ppname}
% The text string ``pp'' for use in page ranges.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\ppname{pp}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\numbername}
% The text string ``number'' for use in article reference.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\numbername{number}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\volumename}
% The text string ``volume'' for use in article reference.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\volumename{volume}
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\Dated@name}
% \begin{macro}{\Received@name}
% \begin{macro}{\Revised@name}
% \begin{macro}{\Accepted@name}
% \begin{macro}{\Published@name}
% These texts are used in the \cmd\date, et al. commands.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\Dated@name{Dated: }%
\def\Received@name{Received }%
\def\Revised@name{Revised }%
\def\Accepted@name{Accepted }%
\def\Published@name{Published }%
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%    \end{macro}
%
% \section{Legacy Commands}
% We define some commands left over from version 3.1, or give default meanings.
% Some definitions can be overridden
% in the document preamble or in included packages.
%
% Note on the namespace: command names like \cmd\REV@\emph{name} are used here,
% because it is not clear that any of this code is generally useful.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\address{\replace@command\address\affiliation}%
\def\altaddress{\replace@command\altaddress\altaffiliation}%
\newenvironment{references}{%
 \class@warn@end{The references environment is not supported; use thebibliography instead.}
 \gdef\references{\thebibliography{}}\references
}{%
 \endthebibliography
}%
\def\draft{%
 \class@warn@end{Command \string\draft\space is obsolete;^^JInvoke option draft instead.}%
 \@booleantrue\draft@sw
}%
\def\tighten{%
 \class@warn@end{Command \string\tighten\space is obsolete;^^JInvoke option tightenlines instead.}%
 \@booleantrue\tightenlines@sw
}%
\def\tableline{%
 \noalign{%
  \class@warn@end{Command \string\tableline\space is obsolete;^^JUse \string\colrule\space instead.}%
  \global\let\tableline\colrule
 }%
 \tableline
}%
\def\case{\replace@command\case\frac}%
\def\slantfrac{\replace@command\slantfrac\frac}%
\def\tablenote{\replace@command\tablenote\footnote}%
\def\tablenotemark{\replace@command\tablenotemark\footnotemark}%
\def\tablenotetext{\replace@command\tablenotetext\footnotetext}%
% Lose the following definition:
\DeclareRobustCommand\REV@text[1]{%
 \relax
 \ifmmode
  \mathchoice
   {\hbox{{\everymath{\displaystyle     }#1}}}%
   {\hbox{{\everymath{\textstyle        }#1}}}%
   {\hbox{{\everymath{\scriptstyle      }\let\f@size\sf@size\selectfont#1}}}%
   {\hbox{{\everymath{\scriptscriptstyle}\let\f@size\ssf@size\selectfont#1}}}%
  \glb@settings
 \else
  \mbox{#1}%
 \fi
}%
% Lose the following definition:
\DeclareRobustCommand\REV@bbox[1]{%
 \relax
 \ifmmode
  \mathchoice
   {\hbox{{\everymath{\displaystyle     }\boldmath$#1$}}}%
   {\hbox{{\everymath{\textstyle        }\boldmath$#1$}}}%
   {\hbox{{\everymath{\scriptstyle      }\boldmath$#1$}}}%
   {\hbox{{\everymath{\scriptscriptstyle}\boldmath$#1$}}}%
  \glb@settings
 \else
  \mbox{#1}%
 \fi
}%
\DeclareRobustCommand\REV@bm[1]{%
 \class@warn@end{To use \string\bm, please load the bm package!}%
 \global\let\bm\relax
}%
\def\FL{\obsolete@command\FL}%
\def\FR{\obsolete@command\FR}%
\def\narrowtext{\obsolete@command\narrowtext}%
\def\mediumtext{\obsolete@command\mediumtext}%
\newenvironment{quasitable}{%
 \let@environment{tabular}{longtable}%
}{%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\text}
% \begin{macro}{\bm}
% \begin{macro}{\bibinfo}
% \begin{macro}{\eprint}
% \begin{macro}{\url}
% 
% If not otherwise defined, give default meanings to certain commands.
% \changes{4.0d}{2000/04/10}{eprint takes an optional argument, syntactical only in this case.}
%FIXME: \cmd\bibinfo?
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\text\REV@text
\let\bm\REV@bm
\appdef\setup@hook{%
 \providecommand\bibinfo[2]{#2}%
 \providecommand\eprint[2][]{#2}%
%\providecommand\url[1]{#1}%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\bbox}
% 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\bbox#1{%
 \class@warn@end{\string\bbox\space is obsolete,^^Jload the bm package and use \string\bm\space instead.}%
 \global\let\bbox\relax
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\mathletters}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{mathletters}{%
 \class@warn@end{Environment {mathletters} is obsolete;^^Jload the amsmath package and use {subequations}!}%
 \global\let\mathletters\@empty
}{%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\eqnum}
% 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\eqnum#1{%
 \class@warn@end{\string\eqnum\space is obsolete, load the amsmath package and use \string\tag!}%
 \global\let\eqnum\@gobble
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% We read in the symbol definitions.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\appdef\rtx@require@packages{%
 \RequirePackage{revsymb4-2}%
}%
\appdef\class@documenthook{\revsymb@inithook}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%
% \section{Corrected Indentation for \texttt{tableofcontents}}
% \changes{4.2a}{2014/12/31}{(MD, Aptara) Make titles in bibliography default, prb style to follow other Phys. Rev. journals, add a unified physrev option as well as prx, prapplied, prmaterials, prfluids, prab, and prper options. Corrected indentation for tableofcontents appearing along with listoffigure/listoftable.}%
%
% Corrected indentation for \texttt{tableofcontents}, when appearing with \texttt{listoffigure} or \texttt{listoftable}.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%%
\def\@startflt#1{%
  \begingroup
    %\toc@pre
    \makeatletter
    \@input{\jobname.#1}%
    \if@filesw
      \expandafter\newwrite\csname tf@#1\endcsname
      \immediate\openout \csname tf@#1\endcsname \jobname.#1\relax
    \fi
    \@nobreakfalse
    %\toc@post
  \endgroup
}%
\def\att@TOC{toc}%
\def\print@toc#1{%
 \begingroup
  \expandafter\section
  \expandafter*%
  \expandafter{%
              \csname#1name\endcsname
              }%
  \let\appendix\appendix@toc
  \def\tempa{#1}%
  \ifx\tempa\att@TOC%%
  \@starttoc{#1}%
  \else%%
  \@startflt{#1}%%
  \fi%%
 \endgroup
}%
%%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%
% \section{Patches for lineno.sty}
%
% The \classname{lineno} package detects the case where the package has been loaded
% and the document invokes \cmd\linelabel, but the \cmd\linenumbers\ command has not been
% issued: it treats this case as an error. 
%
% It is wrong for validity of document syntax to be dependent upon package semantics: 
% we make the condition a warning rather than an error.  
% 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@LN@LLerror@org{%
 \PackageError{lineno}{%
  \string\linelabel\space without \string\linenumbers
 }{% 
  Just see documentation. (New feature v4.11)%
 }%
 \@gobble
}%
\def\@LN@LLerror@ltx{%
 \PackageWarning{lineno}{%
  To make the \string\linelabel\space command work, you must issue the \string\linenumbers\ command 
 }%
 \@gobble
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% 
% If appropriate, enable line numbering within the abstract. 
%
% This mechanism applies generally:
% Create the box in a context in which the meaning of \cmd\par\ has been patched by \classname{lineno},
% then \cmd\unvbox\ the box in a context where \cmd\set@linepenalties\ has been executed, and 
% follow up with \cmd\@linenumberpar, which forces a visit to the output routine just there.
% Note that here, we have to de-fang \cmd\@LN@parpgbrk, which would otherwise causes the appearance
% of a box with depth -1000 points. Go figure.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\appdef\class@documenthook{%
 \@ifx{\@LN@LLerror\@LN@LLerror@org}{%
  \class@info{Overriding \string\@LN@LLerror}%
  \let\@LN@LLerror\@LN@LLerror@ltx
 }{}%
 \@ifpackageloaded{lineno}{%
  \@ifxundefined{\set@linepenalties}{}{%
   \def\prep@absbox{\set@linepenalties}%
   \def\post@absbox{\let\@LN@parpgbrk\@empty\@linenumberpar}%
  }%
 }{}%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% One may well ask: how to obtain line numbering within an alignment in a float?
% This objective, along with line numbering within footnotes, would require extraordinary measures.
% The float would have to be thrown onto the MVL in order to acquire its line numbers, but
% that fragment of MVL would then have to be protected from being shipped out.
% The question of how to coordinate those lines' numbers with those of lines in the MVL would 
% also require dealing with.
%
% \section{Endgame for the Document Class}
%
% We provide for a ``job macro package'' that can override
% definitions and assignments made by the class or any other packages it loads.
%
% \subsection{Job Macro Package}
% You can create a ``job macro package'' for your document
% that will be read in automatically every time
% your document is processed.
% Thus, if your job is a file called \file{myarticle.tex},
% then the file \file{myarticle.rty} will be read in
% just the same as if you had placed a 
% \cmd\usepackage|{myarticle.rty}| statement
% immediately following your \cmd\documentclass\ statement.
%
% Within your \file{.rty} file,
% you can define and use control sequence names that use the |@| character
% and you can override any of the definitions or assignments made 
% by the \revtex\ document class or the selected journal substyle.
% That is, you have the power to really mess things up badly.
%
% If you choose to have a job macro package, you are well 
% advised to read the \LaTeX\ guide to document classes,
% \file{clsguide.tex} or read up on the subject 
% in a book like the \LaTeX\ Companion.
%
% The file \file{template.rty} contains a template for
% creating your own job macro package.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\appdef\rtx@require@packages{%
 \InputIfFileExists{\jobname.rty}{}{}%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection{Endgame Processing for the Document Class}
%
% The remaining steps in processing the document class involve
% determining the needed society, journal, and pointsize from 
% the document's class options and inputting the needed files or
% executing the indicated procedures. 
%
% Note that the society file is expected to declare options that will
% allow us to determine the journal involved, and the society and journal
% themselves determine the which pointsize options are declared, along with
% their meanings. 
% 
% Note also that required packages are read in only after the document options
% have been processed, because the latter can affect the former. 
% 
% Finally, the setup code is executed: this is code that depends on the 
% meanings of the switches we define and on the code within the packages we load. 
%
% Note that there are other hooks in use: \cmd\document@inithook, which is 
% executed right at the beginning of the document, and \cmd\class@documenthook, 
% which serves as a vehicle for any \cmd\AtBeginDocument\ code we might wish to
% execute. 
%
%FIXME: use \cmd\class@documenthook\ only for things that bear on the MVL; 
% use \cmd\document@inithook\ for all patches to procedures defined within the preamble. 
%
% Remember that \classname{natbib} changes its state at \cmd\AtBeginDocument\ time,
% so we have to install our own code at a later point in the processing.
%
% We determine the proper \cmd\@society\ by examining the document's class options. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@parse@class@options@society
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% Then, we input the society's substyle
% (which may in turn lead to loading a journal substyle or a pointsize substyle). 
% The substyle should not assume the value of any class option: 
% instead, it should install code into \cmd\setup@hook. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@process@society{aps}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% Now that the society has defined the class options relating to journals,
% and has defined \cmd\@journal@default, we can process the journal substyle. 
% We parse the options for one that sets \cmd\@journal.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@parse@class@options@\@journal
%    \end{macrocode}
% And we process the journal. 
% Note that \emph{it is an error} for a society file to fail to define
% \cmd\@journal@default.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\@process@journal\expandafter{\@journal@default}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% Now that the society and journal have finished defining any options relating to 
% point size, we process the class options for any that set \cmd\@pointsize.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@parse@class@options@\@pointsize
%    \end{macrocode}
% And we process the pointsize.
% Note that it is an error for the society and journal to leave \cmd\@pointsize@default\ 
% undefined at this point, however, the journal may have overriden the assignment of the society. 
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\expandafter\@process@pointsize\expandafter{\@pointsize@default}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% Next, we process the class options for once and all. 
% Doing so sets values for some of the Booleans that were introduced along with
% the \cmd\DeclareOption\ statements above. 
%
%CHANGE: We process the options in the order declared in the document; this 
% gives the document greater control. 
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@options
%    \end{macrocode}
% 
% Now that the class options have been processed, we can load all the 
% packages that we know need loading.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\rtx@require@packages
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% At this point, the society substyle, the journal substyle, and the 
% pointsize have all been processed, along with the document class options.
% Some of these have left things for later; we do these now.
%
% \begin{macro}{\setup@hook}
%
% This portion of the code for this class file
% \emph{must} appear at the very end:
% The procedure 
% \cmd\setup@hook\
% should be executed at the very end of the class file. 
% Any code that relies on the value of any of the \texttt{@sw} switches
% or will patch the code of one of the required packages
% should be executed here. 
%\changes{4.2a}{2017/11/28}{(MD) Add call to \normalsize to be a good citizen and allow booktabs.sty to work properly}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\appdef\setup@hook{\normalsize}%
\setup@hook
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% Warn if past maturation date. This code to be enabled only in beta software.
% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/11}{(AO, 522) Warn if software is expired}%
% \changes{4.1h}{2009/10/09}{(AO) Remove expiry code in the release software}%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*ignore>
 \def\rtx@fin@year{2010}%
 \def\rtx@fin@month{01}%
 \def\rtx@fin@day{01}%
 \def\rtx@fin@warn{%
  \@ifnum{\rtx@fin@year>\the\year\relax}{\true@sw}{%
   \@ifnum{\rtx@fin@month>\the\month\relax}{\true@sw}{%
    \@ifnum{\rtx@fin@day>\the\day\relax}{\true@sw}{%
     \false@sw
    }%
   }%
  }%
  {%
   \class@info{Beta software expires \rtx@fin@year-\rtx@fin@month-\rtx@fin@day; updates available at https://journals.aps.org/revtex/}%
  }{%
   \class@warn{Outdated software expired \rtx@fin@year-\rtx@fin@month-\rtx@fin@day; please retrieve an update at https://journals.aps.org/revtex/}%
  }%
 }%
%</ignore>
%    \end{macrocode}
% In shipping (non-beta) software, the following line should be commented out.
% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/11}{(AO, 522) Warn if software is expired}%
%    \begin{verbatim}
%\appdef\class@enddocumenthook{\rtx@fin@warn}%
%    \end{verbatim}
%
% End of the class file.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</package>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%
% \section{Symbols: the \texttt{revsymb} module}
% We immediately define a utility command: this module's warning.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*revsymb>
\def\REVSYMB@warn#1{\PackageWarningNoLine{revsymb}{#1}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\lambdabar}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand\lambdabar{%
  \bgroup
    \def\@tempa{%
      \hbox{%
        \raise.73\ht\z@
        \hb@xt@\z@{%
          \kern.25\wd\z@
          \vrule \@width.5\wd\z@\@height.1\p@\@depth.1\p@
          \hss
        }%
        \box\z@
      }%
    }%
    \mathchoice
      {\setbox\z@\hbox{$\displaystyle     \lambda$}\@tempa}%
      {\setbox\z@\hbox{$\textstyle        \lambda$}\@tempa}%
      {\setbox\z@\hbox{$\scriptstyle      \lambda$}\@tempa}%
      {\setbox\z@\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\lambda$}\@tempa}%
  \egroup
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\openone}
% DPC: Really should use a font that includes this glyph.
% Unfortunately not in AMS ones, but is in bbold, cmbb.
% (I think, must check),
% \changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{use font-dependent spacing}
% FIXME: check for bbold.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand\openone{\leavevmode\hbox{\small1\normalsize\kern-.33em1}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\corresponds}
% \begin{macro}{\overdots}
% \begin{macro}{\overcirc}
% J\"org Knappen suggests the replacements:
% replace \cmd\corresponds\ with \cmd\triangleq, source \classname{amssymb};
% replace \cmd\overcirc\ with \cmd\mathring, source \classname{latex2e};
% replace \cmd\overdots\ with \cmd\dddot, source \classname{amsmath}.
%
% Any use of any of these commands will result in a warning message at the end 
% of the log file. If the corresponding package is not loaded, a
% definition will quietly be provided.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand\corresponds{\replace@command\corresponds\triangleq}%
\DeclareRobustCommand\overcirc{\replace@command\overcirc\mathring}%
\DeclareRobustCommand\overdots{\replace@command\overdots\dddot}%
\DeclareRobustCommand\REV@triangleq{%
 {\lower.2ex\hbox{=}}{\kern-.75em^\triangle}%
}%
\DeclareRobustCommand\REV@dddot[1]{%
 \@ontopof{#1}{\cdots}{1.0}\mathord{\box2}%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\succsim}
% \begin{macro}{\precsim}
% \begin{macro}{\lesssim}
% \begin{macro}{\gtrsim}
% \begin{macro}{\alt}
% \begin{macro}{\agt}
% These version 3.1 commands are always supplied, 
% but the definitions in \classname{amssymb} are preferred.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand\altsuccsim{\succ\kern-.9em_\sim\kern.3em}%
\DeclareRobustCommand\altprecsim{\prec\kern-1em_\sim\kern.3em}%
\let\REV@succsim\altsuccsim
\let\REV@precsim\altprecsim
\DeclareRobustCommand\REV@lesssim{\mathrel{\mathpalette\vereq{<}}}%
\DeclareRobustCommand\REV@gtrsim{\mathrel{\mathpalette\vereq{>}}}%
\DeclareRobustCommand\alt{\lesssim}
\DeclareRobustCommand\agt{\gtrsim}
\def\vereq#1#2{%
 \lower3\p@\vbox{%
  \baselineskip1.5\p@
  \lineskip1.5\p@
  \ialign{$\m@th#1\hfill##\hfil$\crcr#2\crcr\sim\crcr}%
 }%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\tensor}
% \begin{macro}{\overstar}
% \begin{macro}{\loarrow}
% \begin{macro}{\roarrow}
% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: remove duplicates}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand\tensor[1]{\@ontopof{#1}{\leftrightarrow}{1.15}\mathord{\box2}}
\DeclareRobustCommand\overstar[1]{\@ontopof{#1}{\ast}{1.15}\mathord{\box2}}
\DeclareRobustCommand\loarrow[1]{\@ontopof{#1}{\leftarrow}{1.15}\mathord{\box2}}
\DeclareRobustCommand\roarrow[1]{\@ontopof{#1}{\rightarrow}{1.15}\mathord{\box2}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@ontopof}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@ontopof#1#2#3{%
 {%
  \mathchoice
    {\@@ontopof{#1}{#2}{#3}\displaystyle     \scriptstyle      }%
    {\@@ontopof{#1}{#2}{#3}\textstyle        \scriptstyle      }%
    {\@@ontopof{#1}{#2}{#3}\scriptstyle      \scriptscriptstyle}%
    {\@@ontopof{#1}{#2}{#3}\scriptscriptstyle\scriptscriptstyle}%
 }%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@@ontopof}
% Same as \revtex3, more or less.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@@ontopof#1#2#3#4#5{%
  \setbox\z@\hbox{$#4#1$}%
  \setbox\f@ur\hbox{$#5#2$}%
  \setbox\tw@\null\ht\tw@\ht\z@ \dp\tw@\dp\z@
  \@ifdim{\wd\z@>\wd\f@ur}{%
    \setbox\f@ur\hb@xt@\wd\z@{\hss\box\f@ur\hss}%
    \mathord{\rlap{\raise#3\ht\z@\box\f@ur}\box\z@}%
  }{%
    \setbox\f@ur\hb@xt@.9\wd\f@ur{\hss\box\f@ur\hss}%
    \setbox\z@\hb@xt@\wd\f@ur{\hss$#4\relax#1$\hss}%
    \mathord{\rlap{\copy\z@}\raise#3\ht\z@\box\f@ur}%
  }%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\frak}
% Deal with legacy \cmd\frak:
% if \classname{amsfonts} not loaded, defined in such a way as to ask for that package.
% Also, says to use \cmd\mathfrak\ instead.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand\frak{%
 \REVSYMB@warn{%
  Command \string\frak\space unsupported:^^J%
  please use \string\mathfrak\space instead.%
 }%
 \global\let\frak\mathfrak
 \frak
}%
\DeclareRobustCommand\REV@mathfrak{%
 \REVSYMB@warn{%
  Command \string\mathfrak\space undefined:^^J%
  please specify the amsfonts or amssymb option!%
 }%
 \global\let\mathfrak\@firstofone
 \mathfrak
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\Bbb}
% Deal with legacy \cmd\Bbb:
% if \classname{amsfonts} not loaded, defined in such a way as to ask for that package.
% Also, says to use \cmd\mathbb\ instead.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand\Bbb{%
 \REVSYMB@warn{%
  Command \string\Bbb\space unsupported:^^J%
  please use \string\mathbb\space instead.%
 }%
 \global\let\Bbb\mathbb
 \Bbb
}%
\DeclareRobustCommand\REV@mathfrak{%
 \REVSYMB@warn{%
  Command \string\mathbb\space undefined:^^J%
  please specify the amsfonts or amssymb option!%
 }%
 \global\let\mathbb\@firstofone
 \mathbb
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\Bigglb}
% Deal with legacy bold delimiters. 
% Each of the following takes an implicit argument consisting of
% the delimiter to be made big and bold.
% FIXME: \cmd\DeclareBoldMathCommand\ is not the right tool!
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\Bigglb{\REV@boldopen \Bigg}%
\def\Biglb {\REV@boldopen \Big }%
\def\bigglb{\REV@boldopen \bigg}%
\def\biglb {\REV@boldopen \big }%
\def\Biggrb{\REV@boldclose\Bigg}%
\def\Bigrb {\REV@boldclose\Big }%
\def\biggrb{\REV@boldclose\bigg}%
\def\bigrb {\REV@boldclose\big }%
\def\REV@pmb#1{%
 \hbox{%
  \setbox\z@=\hbox{#1}%
  \kern-.02em\copy\z@\kern-\wd\z@
  \kern .04em\copy\z@\kern-\wd\z@
  \kern-.02em
  \raise.04em\copy\z@
 }%
}%
\def\REV@boldopen #1#2{\mathopen {\REV@pmb{$#1#2$}}}%
\def\REV@boldclose#1#2{\mathclose{\REV@pmb{$#1#2$}}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\revsymb@inithook}
% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
% Package dependencies are taken care of at \cmd\setup@hook\ time.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\revsymb@inithook{%
 \@ifxundefined\dddot{\let\dddot\REV@dddot}{}%
 \@ifxundefined\triangleq{\let\triangleq\REV@triangleq}{}%
 \@ifxundefined\succsim{\let\succsim\altsuccsim}{}%
 \@ifxundefined\precsim{\let\precsim\altprecsim}{}%
 \@ifxundefined\lesssim{\let\lesssim\REV@lesssim}{}%
 \@ifxundefined\gtrsim {\let\gtrsim \REV@gtrsim }{}%
 \@ifxundefined\mathfrak{\let\mathfrak\REV@mathfrak}{}%
 \@ifxundefined\mathbb{\let\mathbb\REV@mathbb}{}%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</revsymb>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \section{The \classoption{10pt} class option: the \texttt{10pt} module}
% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: all code for \protect\classoption{10pt} is in this module.}
% The file \file{aps10pt.rtx} is read in by the \classname{revtex4} document class
% if \cmd\@pointsize\ has the value 10.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*10pt>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection{Defend Against Forseeable Errors}%
% Protect this file from being read in by anything but \revtex.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifx\undefined\substyle@ext
 \def\@tempa{%
  \endinput
  \GenericWarning{I must be read in by REVTeX! (Bailing out)}%
 }%
 \expandafter\else
  \def\@tempa{}%
 \expandafter\fi\@tempa
 \class@info{RevTeX pointsize 10pt selected}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\normalsize{%
   \@setfontsize\normalsize\@xpt{11.5}%
   \abovedisplayskip 10\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus5\p@
   \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
   \abovedisplayshortskip  \abovedisplayskip
   \belowdisplayshortskip \abovedisplayskip
   \let\@listi\@listI
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\small{%
  \@setfontsize\small\@ixpt{10.5}%
  \abovedisplayskip 8.5\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus4\p@
  \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
  \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus2\p@
  \belowdisplayshortskip 4\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@
  \def\@listi{%
    \leftmargin\leftmargini
    \topsep 4\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@
    \parsep 2\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus\p@
    \itemsep \parsep
  }%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\footnotesize{%
  \@setfontsize\footnotesize\@viiipt{9.5pt}%
  \abovedisplayskip 6\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus4\p@
  \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
  \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus\p@
  \belowdisplayshortskip 3\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus2\p@
  \def\@listi{%
    \leftmargin\leftmargini
    \topsep 3\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus\p@
    \parsep 2\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus\p@
    \itemsep \parsep
  }%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\scriptsize{%
 \@setfontsize\scriptsize\@viipt\@viiipt
}%
\def\tiny{%
 \@setfontsize\tiny\@vpt\@vipt
}%
\def\large{%
 \@setfontsize\large\@xiipt{14pt}%
}%
\def\Large{%
 \@setfontsize\Large\@xivpt{18pt}%
}%
\def\LARGE{%
 \@setfontsize\LARGE\@xviipt{22pt}%
}%
\def\huge{%
 \@setfontsize\huge\@xxpt{25pt}%
}%
\def\Huge{%
 \@setfontsize\Huge\@xxvpt{30pt}%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% The values of these margin parameters are dependent upon 
% \cmd\twoside@sw; any society or journal that 
% has its own preferences should override these assignments
% by doing \cmd\appdef\cmd\setup@hook.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\appdef\setup@hook{%
 \twoside@sw{%
%   \oddsidemargin  -.1in
%   \evensidemargin -.4in
    \oddsidemargin  -20pt
    \evensidemargin -20pt
    \marginparwidth 107pt
 }{%
    \oddsidemargin  -.25in
    \evensidemargin -.25in
    \marginparwidth 30pt
 }%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\marginparsep 6pt
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\topmargin -61pt
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\headheight 25pt
\headsep 16pt
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) class file must set \cs{splittopskip}; fine tune \cs{skip}\cs{footins}; \cs{footnoterule} defined in terms of \cs{skip}\cs{footins}}%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\topskip 10pt
\splittopskip\topskip
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\footskip 30pt
%    \end{macrocode}
% 
%    \begin{macrocode}
 \textheight = 56pc
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\textwidth42.5pc
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\columnsep 1.5pc
\columnseprule 0pt
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) class file must set \cs{splittopskip}; fine tune \cs{skip}\cs{footins}; \cs{footnoterule} defined in terms of \cs{skip}\cs{footins}}%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\footnotesep 1pt
\skip\footins 39pt plus 4pt minus 12pt
\def\footnoterule{%
 \dimen@\skip\footins\divide\dimen@\tw@
 \kern-\dimen@\hrule width.5in\kern\dimen@
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\floatsep 12pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
\textfloatsep 20pt plus 2pt minus 4pt
\intextsep 12pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\dblfloatsep 12pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
\dbltextfloatsep 20pt plus 2pt minus 4pt
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@fptop 0pt plus 1fil
\@fpsep 8pt plus 2fil
\@fpbot 0pt plus 1fil
\@dblfptop 0pt plus 1fil
\@dblfpsep 8pt plus 2fil
\@dblfpbot 0pt plus 1fil
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\marginparpush 5pt
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\parskip 0pt plus 1pt
\parindent 10pt
\emergencystretch8\p@
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\partopsep 2pt plus 1pt minus 1pt
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\leftmargini 25pt
\leftmarginii 22pt
\leftmarginiii 18.7pt
\leftmarginiv 17pt
\leftmarginv 10pt
\leftmarginvi 10pt
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@listI{%
  \leftmargin\leftmargini
  \parsep 4\p@ plus2\p@ minus\p@
  \topsep 8\p@ plus2\p@ minus4\p@
  \itemsep 4\p@ plus2\p@ minus\p@
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\labelsep 4pt
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@listii{%
  \leftmargin\leftmarginii
  \labelwidth\leftmarginii
  \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
  \topsep 4\p@ plus2\p@ minus\p@
  \parsep 2\p@ plus\p@ minus\p@
  \itemsep \parsep
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@listiii{%
  \leftmargin\leftmarginiii
  \labelwidth\leftmarginiii
  \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
  \topsep 2\p@ plus\p@ minus\p@
  \parsep \z@
  \partopsep \p@ plus\z@ minus\p@
  \itemsep \topsep
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@listiv{%
  \leftmargin\leftmarginiv
  \labelwidth\leftmarginiv
  \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@listv{%
  \leftmargin\leftmarginv
  \labelwidth\leftmarginv
  \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@listvi{%
  \leftmargin\leftmarginvi
  \labelwidth\leftmarginvi
  \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</10pt>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \section{The \classoption{11pt} class option: the \texttt{11pt} module}
% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: all code for \protect\classoption{11pt} is in this module.}
% The file \file{11pt.rtx} is read in by the \classname{revtex4} document class
% if \cmd\@pointsize\ has the value 11.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*11pt>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection{Defend Against Forseeable Errors}%
% Protect this file from being read in by anything but \revtex.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifx\undefined\substyle@ext
 \def\@tempa{%
  \endinput
  \GenericWarning{I must be read in by REVTeX! (Bailing out)}%
 }%
 \expandafter\else
  \def\@tempa{}%
 \expandafter\fi\@tempa
 \class@info{RevTeX pointsize 11pt selected}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\normalsize{%
    \@setfontsize\normalsize\@xipt{13.6}%
    \abovedisplayskip 11\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus6\p@
    \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
    \abovedisplayshortskip  \abovedisplayskip
    \belowdisplayshortskip \abovedisplayskip
    \let\@listi\@listI
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\small{%
   \@setfontsize\small\@xpt\@xiipt
   \abovedisplayskip 10\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus5\p@
   \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@
   \belowdisplayshortskip 6\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus3\p@
   \def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
               \topsep 6\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@
               \parsep 3\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus\p@
               \itemsep \parsep
   }%
   \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\footnotesize{%
   \@setfontsize\footnotesize\@ixpt{11}%
   \abovedisplayskip 8\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus4\p@
   \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus\p@
   \belowdisplayshortskip 4\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@
   \def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
               \topsep 4\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@
               \parsep 2\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus\p@
               \itemsep \parsep
   }%
   \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\scriptsize{%
  \@setfontsize\scriptsize\@viiipt{9.5}%
}%
\def\tiny{%
  \@setfontsize\tiny\@vipt\@viipt
}%
\def\large{%
  \@setfontsize\large\@xiipt{14}%
}%
\def\Large{%
  \@setfontsize\Large\@xivpt{18}%
}%
\def\LARGE{%
  \@setfontsize\LARGE\@xviipt{22}%
}%
\def\huge{%
    \@setfontsize\huge\@xxpt{25pt}%
}%
\def\Huge{%
  \@setfontsize\Huge\@xxvpt{30pt}%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</11pt>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \section{The \classoption{12pt} class option: the \texttt{12pt} module}
% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: all code for \protect\classoption{12pt} is in this module.}
% The file \file{12pt.rtx} is read in by the \classname{revtex4} document class
% if \cmd\@pointsize\ has the value 12.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*12pt>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection{Defend Against Forseeable Errors}%
% Protect this file from being read in by anything but \revtex.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifx\undefined\substyle@ext
 \def\@tempa{%
  \endinput
  \GenericWarning{I must be read in by REVTeX! (Bailing out)}%
 }%
 \expandafter\else
  \def\@tempa{}%
 \expandafter\fi\@tempa
 \class@info{RevTeX pointsize 12pt selected}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\normalsize{%
  \@setfontsize\normalsize\@xiipt{14pt}%
  \abovedisplayskip 12\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus7\p@
  \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
  \abovedisplayshortskip  \z@ plus3\p@
  \belowdisplayshortskip  6.5\p@ \@plus3.5\p@ \@minus3\p@
  \let\@listi\@listI
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
 \def\small{%
  \@setfontsize\small\@xipt{14.5pt}%
  \abovedisplayskip 8\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus6\p@
  \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
  \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@
  \belowdisplayshortskip 6.5\p@ \@plus3.5\p@ \@minus3\p@
  \def\@listi{%
    \leftmargin\leftmargini
    \topsep 9\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus5\p@
    \parsep 4.5\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus\p@
    \itemsep \parsep
  }%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% Same baselineskip as \cmd\small\ ?
%    \begin{macrocode}
 \def\footnotesize{%
  \@setfontsize\footnotesize\@xpt{14.5pt}%
  \abovedisplayskip 10\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus5\p@
  \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
  \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@
  \belowdisplayshortskip 6\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus3\p@
  \def\@listi{%
    \leftmargin\leftmargini
    \topsep 6\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@
    \parsep 3\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus\p@
    \itemsep \parsep
  }%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\scriptsize{%
  \@setfontsize\scriptsize\@viiipt{9.5pt}%
}%
\def\tiny{%
  \@setfontsize\tiny\@vipt{7pt}%
}%
\def\large{%
  \@setfontsize\large\@xivpt{18pt}%
}%
\def\Large{%
  \@setfontsize\Large\@xviipt{22pt}%
}%
\def\LARGE{%
  \@setfontsize\LARGE\@xxpt{25pt}%
}%
\def\huge{%
    \@setfontsize\huge\@xxvpt{30pt}%
}%
\let\Huge=\huge
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</12pt>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \section{Page parameters}%
% This code is common to both \classoption{11pt} and \classoption{12pt}.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*11pt|12pt>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\appdef\setup@hook{%
 \twoside@sw{%
  \oddsidemargin   0pt
  \evensidemargin  0pt
  \marginparwidth 60pt
 }{%
  \oddsidemargin 0pt
  \evensidemargin 0pt
  \marginparwidth 44pt
 }%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\marginparsep 10pt
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\topmargin -37pt
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\headheight 12pt
\headsep 25pt
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) class file must set \cs{splittopskip}; fine tune \cs{skip}\cs{footins}; \cs{footnoterule} defined in terms of \cs{skip}\cs{footins}}%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\topskip 10pt
\splittopskip\topskip
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\footskip 30pt
%    \end{macrocode}
% 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\textheight=665.5\p@
%    \end{macrocode}
% 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\appdef\setup@hook{%
 \tightenlines@sw{%
  \def\baselinestretch{1}%
 }{%
  \def\baselinestretch{1.5}%
 }%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\textwidth 468pt
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\columnsep 10pt
\columnseprule 0pt
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) class file must set \cs{splittopskip}; fine tune \cs{skip}\cs{footins}; \cs{footnoterule} defined in terms of \cs{skip}\cs{footins}}%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\footnotesep 1pt
\skip\footins 25.25pt plus 4pt minus 12pt
\def\footnoterule{%
 \dimen@\skip\footins\divide\dimen@\f@ur
 \kern-\dimen@\hrule width.5in\kern\dimen@
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\floatsep        14pt plus 2pt minus 4pt
\textfloatsep    20pt plus 2pt minus 4pt
\intextsep       14pt plus 4pt minus 4pt
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\dblfloatsep     14pt plus 2pt minus 4pt
\dbltextfloatsep 20pt plus 2pt minus 4pt
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@fptop 0pt plus 1fil
\@fpsep 10pt plus 2fil
\@fpbot 0pt plus 1fil
\@dblfptop 0pt plus 1fil
\@dblfpsep 10pt plus 2fil%
\@dblfpbot 0pt plus 1fil
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\marginparpush 7pt
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\parskip 0pt plus 1pt
\parindent 15pt
\emergencystretch8\p@
\partopsep 3pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\leftmargini   30pt
\leftmarginii  26pt
\leftmarginiii 22pt
\leftmarginiv  20pt
\leftmarginv   12pt
\leftmarginvi  12pt
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@listI{\leftmargin\leftmargini \parsep 5\p@ plus2.5\p@ minus\p@
  \topsep 10\p@ plus4\p@ minus6\p@
  \itemsep 5\p@ plus2.5\p@ minus\p@
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\labelsep 6pt
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@listii{\leftmargin\leftmarginii
  \labelwidth\leftmarginii\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
  \topsep 5\p@ plus2.5\p@ minus\p@
  \parsep 2.5\p@ plus\p@ minus\p@
  \itemsep \parsep
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@listiii{\leftmargin\leftmarginiii
  \labelwidth\leftmarginiii\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
  \topsep 2.5\p@ plus\p@ minus\p@
  \parsep \z@ \partopsep \p@ plus\z@ minus\p@
  \itemsep \topsep
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@listiv{\leftmargin\leftmarginiv
  \labelwidth\leftmarginiv\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@listv{\leftmargin\leftmarginv
  \labelwidth\leftmarginv\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@listvi{\leftmargin\leftmarginvi
  \labelwidth\leftmarginvi\advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</11pt|12pt>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \section{The \classoption{aps} class extension: the \texttt{aps} module}
% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: made aps.rtx part of revtex4.dtx}
% The file \file{aps.rtx} is read in by the \classname{revtex4} document class
% if \cmd\@society\ has the value \classoption{aps}.
%
% Here, code specific to APS journals is separated out from the \revtex\ document class.
% (Other societies can customize \revtex\ by supplying their own \file{.rtx} file.)
%
% This class extension file is a model for a class extension you might write yourself.
%
% First, incorporate a \cmd\ProvidesFile\ command with an optional argument giving
% the version information, e.g.,
% \begin{verbatim}
% \ProvidesFile{foo}[2001/09/11 v1.1 Docinfo]%
% \end{verbatim}
%
% Within the society substyle, there are two things we must do as well:
% define the default journal, 
%    \begin{verbatim}
% \def\@journal@default{pra}%
%    \end{verbatim}
% And do likewise for the point size:
%    \begin{verbatim}
% \def\@pointsize@default{10}%
%    \end{verbatim}
%
% We first define some text entities (amounting to journal abbreviations),
% then some APS-specific initializations,
% then code for particular APS journals.
% In the latter case, the choice is 
% keyed off the macro \cmd\@journal.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*aps>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection{Defend Against Forseeable Errors}%
% Protect this file from being read in by anything but \revtex.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifx\undefined\substyle@ext
 \def\@tempa{%
  \endinput
  \GenericWarning{I must be read in by REVTeX! (Bailing out)}%
 }%
 \expandafter\else
  \def\@tempa{}%
 \expandafter\fi\@tempa
 \class@info{RevTeX society APS selected}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% Here are the class options relating to the APS:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{pra}{\change@journal{pra}}%
\DeclareOption{prb}{\change@journal{prb}}%
\DeclareOption{prc}{\change@journal{prc}}%
\DeclareOption{prd}{\change@journal{prd}}%
\DeclareOption{pre}{\change@journal{pre}}%
\DeclareOption{prl}{\change@journal{prl}}%
%\changes{4.2b}{2017/11/21}{(MD) Update options for new titles without "Special Topics" and make prper match style of other journal options}
\DeclareOption{prab}{\change@journal{prab}}%
\DeclareOption{prper}{\change@journal{prper}}%
\DeclareOption{rmp}{\change@journal{rmp}}%
%\changes{4.2b}{2017/11/21}{(MD) Add options for new APS journals and a generic physrev option for future-proofing}
\DeclareOption{prx}{\change@journal{prx}}%
\DeclareOption{prapplied}{\change@journal{prapplied}}%
\DeclareOption{prmaterials}{\change@journal{prmaterials}}%
\DeclareOption{prfluids}{\change@journal{prfluids}}%
\DeclareOption{physrev}{\change@journal{physrev}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection{Abbreviations}%
% \changes{4.1p}{2010/02/24}{(AO, 584) Per MD, remove trailing space character from each journal abbreviation: it had caused an extraneous space in the .bbl} 
% The following macros constitute typing shortcuts for
% certain journal names.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\adv{AIP Advances}%
\def\ao{Appl.\ Opt.}%
\def\ap{Appl.\ Phys.}%
\def\apl{Appl.\ Phys.\ Lett.}%
\def\apm{Appl.\ Phys.\ Lett.\ Mater.}%
\def\apj{Astrophys.\ J.}%
\def\bell{Bell Syst.\ Tech.\ J.}%
\def\bmf{Biomicrofluidics}%
\def\cha{Chaos}%
\def\jqe{IEEE J.\ Quantum Electron.}%
\def\assp{IEEE Trans.\ Acoust.\ Speech Signal Process.}%
\def\aprop{IEEE Trans.\ Antennas Propag.}%
\def\mtt{IEEE Trans.\ Microwave Theory Tech.}%
\def\iovs{Invest.\ Ophthalmol.\ Vis.\ Sci.}%
\def\jcp{J.\ Chem.\ Phys.}%
\def\jap{J.\ Appl.\ Phys.}%
\def\jmp{J.\ Math.\ Phys.}%
\def\jmo{J.\ Mod.\ Opt.}%
\def\josa{J.\ Opt.\ Soc.\ Am.}%
\def\josaa{J.\ Opt.\ Soc.\ Am.\ A}%
\def\josab{J.\ Opt.\ Soc.\ Am.\ B}%
\def\jpp{J.\ Phys.\ (Paris)}%
\def\jpr{J.\ Phys.\ Chem.\ Ref.\ Data}%
\def\ltp{Low.\ Temp.\ Phys.}%
\def\nat{Nature (London)}%
\def\oc{Opt.\ Commun.}%
\def\ol{Opt.\ Lett.}%
\def\pl{Phys.\ Lett.}%
\def\pop{Phys.\ Plasmas}%
\def\pof{Phys.\ Fluids}%
\def\pra{Phys.\ Rev.\ A}%
\def\prb{Phys.\ Rev.\ B}%
\def\prc{Phys.\ Rev.\ C}%
\def\prd{Phys.\ Rev.\ D}%
\def\pre{Phys.\ Rev.\ E}%
\def\prl{Phys.\ Rev.\ Lett.}%
\def\rmp{Rev.\ Mod.\ Phys.}%
\def\rsi{Rev.\ Sci.\ Instrum.}%
\def\rse{J.\ Renewable Sustainable Energy}%
\def\pspie{Proc.\ Soc.\ Photo-Opt.\ Instrum.\ Eng.}%
\def\sjqe{Sov.\ J.\ Quantum Electron.}%
\def\vr{Vision Res.}%
\def\sd{Structural\ Dynamics}%
\def\jor{J.\ Rheol.}%
\def\cp{AIP\ Conference\ Proceedings}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection{APS Setup}%
% Here we define the default procedures for APS journals.
% Individual APS journals may override these definitions.
%
% \subsubsection{Title block}%
%
% The specifics of the title block.
% Apply to all APS journals; individual journals may override these settings.
%
% \begin{macro}{\@fnsymbol}
% The \LaTeX\ kernel definition of \cmd\@fnsymbol\ is overridden.
% The definition in \filename{fixltx2e.sty} serves as a guide to the new way to symbol,
% working in both text- and math modes. 
%
% \filename{fixltx2e.sty} duplicates some features of \filename{ltxgrid} and \filename{ltxutil},
% however, so it may be incompatible with \revtex. 
% In case it is not loaded, we must provide a meaning for \cmd\TextOrMath,
% which that package makes robust. 
% I believe that it is \cmd\@fnsymbol\ itself that ought to be robustified.
% e\TeX\ further complicates matters; we do not especially accomodate it. 
%
% \changes{4.1d}{2009/03/27}{Definition of \cs{	@fnsymbol} follows fixltx2e.sty}
%
% Not! \cmd\TextOrMath\ must be made robust in any case (Bug 530). I return things to follow
% core \LaTeXe\ (\filename{latex.ltx}). 
% \changes{4.1f}{2009/10/05}{(AO, 530) \cs{@fnsymbol}: Failed to import fixltx2e.sty technology. Return to LaTeX core.}
% \changes{4.2f}{2022/06/05}{(PHO) \cs{@fnsymbol}: Correct \cs{ifcase} nesting logic.}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@fnsymbol#1{%
 \ensuremath{%
  \ifcase#1\or
   *\or
   \dagger\or
   \ddagger\or
   \mathsection\or
   \mathparagraph\or
%  \|\or
   **\or
   \dagger\dagger\or
   \ddagger\ddagger\or
   \mathsection\mathsection\or
   \mathparagraph\mathparagraph\or
   ***\or
   \dagger\dagger\dagger\or
   \ddagger\ddagger\ddagger\or
   \mathsection\mathsection\mathsection\or
   \mathparagraph\mathparagraph\mathparagraph
  \else
   \@ctrerr
  \fi
 }%
}%
\appdef\document@inithook{%
 \@ifxundefined\TextOrMath{%
  \DeclareRobustCommand\TextOrMath{\@ifmmode{\false@sw}{\true@sw}}%
 }{}%
}%
\let\thefootnote@latex\thefootnote
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% We assign the default titlepage style for APS; a journal or document instance 
% may override by invoking one of the other \cmd\clo@... procedures defined in \revtex.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\clo@groupedaddress
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\titlepage}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\renewenvironment{titlepage}{%
  \let\wastwocol@sw\twocolumn@sw
  \onecolumngrid
  \newpage
  \thispagestyle{titlepage}%
  \c@page\z@
%    \end{macrocode}
% A comment: ``article.cls sets this to one not zero?''
%    \begin{macrocode}
}{%
  \wastwocol@sw{\twocolumngrid}{\newpage}%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@abstractheading}
% APS Journals all set the abstract head the same way, with no head.
% However, if the user has specified the \classoption{preprint} class option,
% then the abstract will have a head.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\frontmatter@abstractheading{%
 \preprintsty@sw{%
  \begingroup
   \centering\large
   \abstractname
   \par
  \endgroup
 }{}%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@abstractwidth}
% All APS journals set the abstract to the same width.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\frontmatter@abstractwidth{400\p@}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@abstractfont}
% All APS journals set the abstract body the same way.
% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{(AO, 123) add parskip to the abstract.}
% \changes{4.1e}{2008/06/29}{(AO, 455) be nice to a list within the abstract}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\frontmatter@abstractfont{%
 \small
 \parindent1em\relax
 \adjust@abstractwidth
}%
\def\adjust@abstractwidth{%
 \dimen@\textwidth\advance\dimen@-\frontmatter@abstractwidth
 \divide\dimen@\tw@
 \galley@sw{%
  \advance\rightskip\tw@\dimen@
 }{%
  \advance\leftskip\dimen@
  \advance\rightskip\dimen@
 }%
 \@totalleftmargin\leftskip
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%\changes{4.2b}{2017/11/22}{(MD) Change default to not use a title page - it seems antiquated}
% All APS journal preprints use separate titlepage and full-width abstract.
% 
% In effect, we establish a society default value for \cmd\preprintsty@sw,
% and for \cmd\titlepage@sw.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@booleanfalse\preprintsty@sw
\@booleanfalse\titlepage@sw
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% We choose the page style for all APS journals. 
% The journal may override by inserting its own code in \cmd\setup@hook. 
% Users wishing to customize their documents will be able to invoke a \cmd\pagestyle\
% command anywhere in the preamble; it will override the assignments here. 
%
% Here is the big switch for APS preprints. Note that \cmd\preprintsty@sw
% is also consulted in various procedures, but we assume its value does 
% not change after \cmd\setup@hook\ time. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\appdef\setup@hook{%
  \preprintsty@sw{%
   \ps@preprint
   \def\frontmatter@abstractwidth{\textwidth}%
   \def\frontmatter@affiliationfont{\it}%
   \let\section\section@preprintsty
%    \end{macrocode}
% The following line of code had been commented out at this point.
%    \begin{verbatim}
%  \let\@hangfrom@section\@hangfrom@section@preprintsty
%    \end{verbatim}
%    \begin{macrocode}
   \let\subsection\subsection@preprintsty
   \let\subsubsection\subsubsection@preprintsty
  }{%
   \ps@article
  }%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@authorformat}
% All APS journals set the author list the same.
% The leading is 11.5 points, and
% there is 11.5 points of extra space above the first author line
% (which amounts to the same thing as 11.5 points extra below the title)
% for a total of 23 points base-to-base.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\frontmatter@authorformat{%
 \skip@\@flushglue
 \@flushglue\z@ plus.3\hsize\relax
 \centering
 \advance\baselineskip\p@
 \parskip11.5\p@\relax
 \@flushglue\skip@
%    \end{macrocode}
% The following line of code had been commented out at this point.
%    \begin{verbatim}
%\preprintsty@sw{}{%
% \addvspace{0\p@}%
%}%
%    \end{verbatim}
%    \begin{macrocode}
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@above@affilgroup}
% The default amount of space above affiliation.
% APS Journals have 24 points b-b above an affiliation group.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\frontmatter@above@affilgroup{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% The following line of code had been commented out at this point.
%    \begin{verbatim}
%\preprintsty@sw{}{%
% \addvspace{11\p@}%
%}%
%    \end{verbatim}
%    \begin{macrocode}
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@above@affiliation}
% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@above@affiliation@script}
% The default amount of space above affiliation.
% APS Journals have no extra space between author group down to common affiliation.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\frontmatter@above@affiliation@script{%
 \skip@\@flushglue
 \@flushglue\z@ plus.3\hsize\relax
 \centering
 \@flushglue\skip@
 \addvspace{3.5\p@}%
}%
\def\frontmatter@above@affiliation{%
 \preprintsty@sw{}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% The following line of code had been commented out at this point.
%    \begin{verbatim}
% \addvspace{12\p@}%
%    \end{verbatim}
%    \begin{macrocode}
 }%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@affiliationfont}
% All APS journals set the affiliation the same.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\frontmatter@affiliationfont{%
 \small\it
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@collaboration@above}
% PRL: 1.5 points extra: 13 points base-to-base above.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\frontmatter@collaboration@above{%
 \preprintsty@sw{%
 }{%
  \parskip1.5\p@\relax
 }%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@setup}
% All APS journals set the title page using the same font and size.
% However, justification varies for the title block elements, so
% we assert none here.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\frontmatter@setup{%
 \normalfont
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@title@above}
% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@title@format}
% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@title@below}
% All APS journals set the article title the same.
%
% Note: Spacing from title to author is 23 points base-to-base.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\frontmatter@title@above{\addvspace{6\p@}}%
\def\frontmatter@title@format{\large\bfseries\centering\parskip\z@skip}%
\def\frontmatter@title@below{}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@makefnmark}
% All APS journals share this procedure for setting the titlepage footnote text.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@author@parskip{3\p@}%
\def\frontmatter@makefnmark{%
 \@textsuperscript{%
  \normalfont\@thefnmark
 }%
}%
\def\frontmatter@authorbelow{%
 \addvspace{3\p@}%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@RRAP@format}
% All APS journals use the same format for the ``Received, Revised, etc.'' block on the title page.
%
% Change note: 11.5 points b-b from author/affiliation down to date.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\frontmatter@RRAP@format{%
  \small
  \centering
%    \end{macrocode}
% The following line of code had been commented out at this point.
%    \begin{verbatim}
% \preprintsty@sw{}{\parskip.5ex\relax}%
%    \end{verbatim}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \everypar{\hbox\bgroup(\@gobble@leavemode@uppercase}%
  \def\par{\@ifvmode{}{\unskip)\egroup\@@par}}%
}%
\def\punct@RRAP{;\egroup\ \hbox\bgroup}%
\def\@gobble@leavemode@uppercase#1#2{\expandafter\MakeTextUppercase}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@PACS@format}
% 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\frontmatter@PACS@format{%
   \addvspace{11\p@}%
   \footnotesize
   \adjust@abstractwidth
   \parindent\z@
   \parskip\z@skip
   \samepage
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@keys@format}
% 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\frontmatter@keys@format{%
   \footnotesize
   \adjust@abstractwidth
   \parindent\z@
   \samepage
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ps@titlepage}
% \changes{4.0a}{1998/06/10}{multiple preprint commands}
% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Stack \cs{preprint} args flush right at right margin.}
% Title page style. Currently empty except for preprint header,
% which consists of all the \cmd\preprint\ arguments,
% stacked flush right at the right margin.
% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Insert procedure \cs{checkindate}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\ps@titlepage{%
  \def\@oddhead{%
   \hfill
   \preprint@sw{%
    \expandafter\produce@preprints\expandafter{\@preprint}%
   }{}%
  }%
  \let\@evenhead\@oddhead
  \def\@oddfoot{%
   \hb@xt@\z@{\byrevtex\hss}%
   \hfil
   \preprintsty@sw{\thepage}{}%
   \quad\checkindate
   \hfil
  }%
  \let\@evenfoot\@oddfoot
}%
\def\byrevtex{\byrevtex@sw{Typeset by REV\TeX}{}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\produce@preprints}
% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{(AO, 115) If three or more preprints specified, set on single line, with commas.}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\produce@preprints#1{%
 \vtop to \z@{%
  \def\baselinestretch{1}%
  \small
  \let\preprint\preprint@count
  \count@\z@
  #1%
  \@ifnum{\count@>\tw@}{%
   \hbox{%
    \let\preprint\preprint@hlist
    #1%
    \setbox\z@\lastbox
   }%
  }{%
   \let\preprint\preprint@cr
   \halign{\hfil##\cr#1\crcr}%
   \par
   \vss
  }%
 }%
}%
\def\preprint@cr#1{#1\cr}%
\def\preprint@count#1{\advance\count@\@ne}%
\def\preprint@hlist#1{#1\hbox{, }}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsubsection{Stacked Heads}%
% All APS journals put a period (.), followed by quad space, after the section number.
% Also, no hanging section number.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1\endcsname.\quad}%
\def\@hang@from#1#2#3{#1#2#3}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% Note that in the following, we wish to set the section head uppercase, so we use
% David Carlisle's \cmd\MakeTextUppercase. However, because this procedure effectively 
% parses its argument (looking for things to \emph{not} translate), it has to be invoked
% in such a way that the argument of the \cmd\section\ command is passed to it as its
% own argument. 
%
% To accomplish this, we use the \cmd\@hangfrom@\ hook, which was developed for this 
% purpose.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\section{%
  \@startsection
    {section}%
    {1}%
    {\z@}%
    {0.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
    {0.5cm}%
    {%
      \normalfont\small\bfseries
      \centering
    }%
}%
\def\@hangfrom@section#1#2#3{\@hangfrom{#1#2}\MakeTextUppercase{#3}}%
\def\@hangfroms@section#1#2{#1\MakeTextUppercase{#2}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\subsection{%
  \@startsection
    {subsection}%
    {2}%
    {\z@}%
    {.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
    {.5cm}%
    {%
     \normalfont\small\bfseries
     \centering
    }%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\subsubsection{%
  \@startsection
    {subsubsection}%
    {3}%
    {\z@}%
    {.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
    {.5cm}%
    {%
     \normalfont\small\itshape
     \centering
    }%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsubsection{Runin Heads}%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\paragraph{%
  \@startsection
    {paragraph}%
    {4}%
    {\parindent}%
    {\z@}%
    {-1em}%
    {\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\subparagraph{%
  \@startsection
    {subparagraph}%
    {5}%
    {\parindent}%
    {3.25ex \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
    {-1em}%
    {\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries}%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\section@preprintsty}
% \begin{macro}{\subsection@preprintsty}
% \begin{macro}{\subsubsection@preprintsty}
% Here are the formatting procedures specific to the preprint style;
% the only difference is that the heads are flush left instead of centered.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\section@preprintsty{%
  \@startsection
    {section}%
    {1}%
    {\z@}%
    {0.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
    {0.5cm}%
    {%
      \normalfont\small\bfseries
%     \centering
    }%
}%
%\def\@hangfrom@section@preprintsty#1#2#3{\@hangfrom{#1#2}\MakeTextUppercase{#3}}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\subsection@preprintsty{%
  \@startsection
    {subsection}%
    {2}%
    {\z@}%
    {.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
    {.5cm}%
    {%
     \normalfont\small\bfseries
%    \centering
    }%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\subsubsection@preprintsty{%
  \@startsection
    {subsubsection}%
    {3}%
    {\z@}%
    {.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
    {.5cm}%
    {%
     \normalfont\small\itshape
%    \centering
    }%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% By default, APS journals set titlepage notes as footnotes.
%    \begin{verbatim}
\let\frontmatter@footnote@produce\frontmatter@footnote@produce@footnote
%    \end{verbatim}
%
% \subsubsection{Table of Contents}%
% The toc will itself make an entry in the toc, 
% but we temporarily turn off toc formatting for the duration.
% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/19}{(AO, 461) Change the csname revtex uses from @dotsep to ltxu@dotsep. The former is understood in mu. (What we wanted was a dimension.)}%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@pnumwidth{1.55em}%
\def\@tocrmarg {2.55em}%
\def\@dotsep{2}%
\def\ltxu@dotsep{4.5pt}%
\setcounter{tocdepth}{3}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\tableofcontents{%
 \addtocontents{toc}{\string\tocdepth@munge}%
 \print@toc{toc}%
 \addtocontents{toc}{\string\tocdepth@restore}%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\tocdepth@munge{%
  \let\l@section@saved\l@section
  \let\l@section\@gobble@tw@
}%
\def\@gobble@tw@#1#2{}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\tocdepth@restore{%
  \let\l@section\l@section@saved
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% The following definition of \cmd\l@part\ is a variant on
% the definition of \cmd\l@@sections\ in \file{ltxutil.dtx}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\l@part#1#2{\addpenalty{\@secpenalty}%
 \begingroup
  \set@tocdim@pagenum\@tempboxa{#2}%
% \@tempdima 3em %
  \parindent \z@
  \rightskip\tocleft@pagenum plus 1fil\relax
  \skip@\parfillskip\parfillskip\z@
  \addvspace{2.25em plus\p@}%
  \large \bf %
  \leavevmode\ignorespaces#1\unskip\nobreak\hskip\skip@
  \hb@xt@\rightskip{\hfil\unhbox\@tempboxa}\hskip-\rightskip\hskip\z@skip
  \par
  \nobreak %
 \endgroup
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\l@section}
% Determine which TOC elements are automatically indented.
%
% We set the TOC to the standard of RMP. 
% If APS has its own specification, we will code it, and RMP must override.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\tocleft@{\z@}%
\def\tocdim@min{5\p@}%
\def\l@section{%
 \l@@sections{}{section}% Implicit #3#4
}%
\def\l@f@section{%
 \addpenalty{\@secpenalty}%
 \addvspace{1.0em plus\p@}%
 %\bf
}%
\def\l@subsection{%
 \l@@sections{section}{subsection}% Implicit #3#4
}%
\def\l@subsubsection{%
 \l@@sections{subsection}{subsubsection}% Implicit #3#4
}%
\def\l@paragraph#1#2{}%
\def\l@subparagraph#1#2{}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% Activate the auto TOC processing.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\toc@pre\toc@pre@auto
\let\toc@post\toc@post@auto
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsubsection{Default column bottom}%
% All APS journal styles have flush bottoms.
%\changes{4.1n}{2009/11/30}{(AO, 566) restore 4.0 behavior: flush column bottoms}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@booleanfalse\raggedcolumn@sw
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%
% \subsubsection{Table alignment style}%
%
% \begin{macro}{\tableft@skip@float}
% \begin{macro}{\tabmid@skip@float}
% \begin{macro}{\tabright@skip@float}
% \begin{macro}{\array@row@pre@float}
% \begin{macro}{\array@row@pst@float}
% All APS publications have the same table specification:
% Scotch rules above and below, centered in column.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\tableft@skip@float{\z@ plus\hsize}%
\def\tabmid@skip@float{\@flushglue}%
\def\tabright@skip@float{\z@ plus\hsize}%
\def\array@row@pre@float{\hline\hline\noalign{\vskip\doublerulesep}}%
\def\array@row@pst@float{\noalign{\vskip\doublerulesep}\hline\hline}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsubsection{Footnote formatting}%
% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 572) \cs{@makefntext} and \cs{frontmatter@makefntext} must be defined harmoniously}%
% We customize the formatting of footnotes for all APS journals.
% \begin{macro}{\@makefntext}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\@makefntext#1{%
 \def\baselinestretch{1}%
 \leftskip1em%
 \parindent1em%
 \noindent
 \nobreak\hskip-\leftskip
 \hb@xt@\leftskip{%
  \hss\@makefnmark\ %
 }%
 #1%
 \par
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@makefntext}
% We ensure that frontmatter footnotes format similarly to body footnotes. 
% But we provide our own hypertext anchor, otherwise not provided.
% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 572) Independent footnote counter for title block. Abstract footnote counter shared with body.}%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\frontmatter@makefntext#1{%
 \def\baselinestretch{1}%
 \leftskip1em%
 \parindent1em%
 \noindent
 \nobreak\hskip-\leftskip
 \Hy@raisedlink{\hyper@anchorstart{frontmatter.\expandafter\the\csname c@\@mpfn\endcsname}\hyper@anchorend}%
 \hb@xt@\leftskip{%
  \hss\@makefnmark\ %
 }%
 #1%
 \par
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsubsection{Appendix}%
% \begin{macro}{\appendix}
% \begin{macro}{\@hangfrom@appendix}
% \begin{macro}{\@hangfroms@appendix}
% \begin{macro}{\@appendixcntformat}
% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{(AO, 129) section* within appendix was producing appendixname}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\prepdef\appendix{%
 \par
 \let\@hangfrom@section\@hangfrom@appendix
%\let\@hangfroms@section\@hangfroms@appendix
 \let\@sectioncntformat\@appendixcntformat
}%
\def\@hangfrom@appendix#1#2#3{%
 #1%
 \@if@empty{#2}{%
  #3%
 }{%
  #2\@if@empty{#3}{}{:\ #3}%
 }%
}%
\def\@hangfroms@appendix#1#2{%
 #1#2%
}%
\def\@appendixcntformat#1{\appendixname\ \csname the#1\endcsname}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsubsection{Bibliography}%
% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/04}{(AO, 576) In .bst files, remove support for the annote field}%
%
% Customize \revtex\ for the journal substyle;
% this task requires three components:
% the \BibTeX\ \file{apsrev.bst} and \file{apsrmp.bst} style files, and
% customizations of the \env{thebibliography} environment.
%
% \begin{macro}{\@bibstyle}
% Define the argument of the \cmd\bibliographystyle\ command
% (if the document does not do so).
% The user must have installed a \file{.bst} file of the corresponding name.
% This file will then be used by \BibTeX\ when compiling the document's \file{.bbl} file.
%
%  To generate \file{apsrev.bst}, use \classname{custom-bib} version 4.21 or later.
%  Run the \file{.bst} generator, \file{makebst.tex}, and
%  accept all defaults, with the following exceptions:
%
% \def\QandA#1#2#3{\item#1: \textbf{#2}: \texttt{#3}---}%
% \def\CandE#1{\item\relax\texttt{#1}---}%
% \begin{enumerate}
% \QandA{LANGUAGE FIELD}{l}{lang}Use language field to switch hyphenation patterns for title
% \QandA{PRESENTATIONS}{b}{pres,pres-bf}Presentation, speaker bold face 
% \QandA{ORDERING OF REFERENCES}{c}{seq-no}Citation order (unsorted, like unsrt.bst)
% \QandA{ORDER ON VON PART}{x}{vonx}Sort without von part (de la Maire after Mahone)
% \QandA{AUTHOR NAMES}{i}{nm-init,ed-au}Initials + surname (J. F. Smith)
% \QandA{POSITION OF JUNIOR}{*}{jnrlst}Junior comes last as Smith, John, Jr.
% \QandA{TYPEFACE FOR AUTHORS IN LIST OF REFERENCES}{u}{nmft,nmft-def}User defined author font (\cmd\bibnamefont)
% \QandA{FONT FOR FIRST NAMES}{u}{fnm-def}First names in user defined font (\cmd\bibfnamefont)
% \QandA{EDITOR NAMES IN INCOLLECTION ETC}{a}{nmfted}Editors incollection like authors font
% \QandA{FONT FOR `AND' IN LIST}{r}{nmand-rm}`And' in normal font (JONES and JAMES)
% \QandA{FONT OF CITATION LABELS IN TEXT}{u}{lab,lab-def}User defined citation font (\cmd\citenamefont)
% \QandA{FONT FOR `AND' IN CITATIONS}{r}{and-rm}Cited `and' in normal font 
% \QandA{DATE FORMAT}{*}{yr-par}Date in parentheses as (May 1993)
% \QandA{DATE EMPTY}{-}{date-nil-x}If date is empty, then do not produce the surrounding punctuation (parens, brackets, colon, comma)
% \QandA{TITLE OF ARTICLE}{d}{tit-qq}Title and punctuation in double quotes (``Title,'' ..)
% \QandA{INPROCEEDINGS CHAPTER AND PAGES, LIKE INBOOK}{-}{inproceedings-chapter}produce pages after chapter, just as in InBook
% \QandA{TITLE PRESENT IN ARTICLE, INCOLLECTION, AND INPROCEEDINGS}{x}{jtit-x}Title is ignored
% \QandA{INPROCEEDINGS CHAPTER AND PAGES, LIKE INBOOK}{y}{inproceedings-chapter}produce pages after chapter, just as in InBook
% \QandA{ARTICLE BOOKTITLE PRESENT}{}{article-booktitle}format booktitle 
% \QandA{ARTICLE SERIES PRESENT}{}{article-series}article can has series
% \QandA{JOURNAL NAME FONT}{r}{jttl-rm}Journal name normal font
% \QandA{JOURNAL NAME WITH ADDRESS}{y}{journal-address}Include address field (in parentheses) along with journal name
% \QandA{BOOK TITLE FIELDS}{y}{book-bt}Field `booktitle', or if absent field `title', is book title 
% \QandA{THESIS TITLE OPTIONAL}{}{thesis-title-o}Title is optional: no warning issued if empty
% \QandA{TECHNICAL REPORT TITLE}{b}{trtit-b}Tech. report title like books 
% \QandA{TECHNICAL REPORT INSTITUTION}{}{techreport-institution-par}format tech report institution like book publisher
% \QandA{JOURNAL VOLUME}{b}{vol-bf}Volume bold as {\bf vol}(num)
% \QandA{JOURNAL VOL AND NUMBER}{x}{vnum-x}Journal vol, without number as 34
% \QandA{VOLUME PUNCTUATION}{c}{volp-com}Volume with comma as vol(num), ppp
% \QandA{PAGE NUMBERS}{f}{jpg-1}Only start page number 
% \QandA{BOOK EDITOR W/O AUTHOR}{}{book-editor-booktitle}Book permits empty author, produces title before editor in this case
% \QandA{INBOOK PERMITS TITLE, BOOKTITLE, AUTHOR, EDITOR}{a}{inbook-editor-booktitle}Allow using both title/booktitle, both author/editor
% \QandA{CONFERENCE ADDRESS FOR BOOK, INBOOK, INCOLLECTION, INPROCEEDINGS, PROCEEDINGS}{a}{bookaddress}Italic booktitle followed by bookaddress in roman
% \QandA{NUMBER AND SERIES FOR BOOK, INBOOK, INCOLLECTION, INPROCEEDINGS, PROCEEDINGS}{*}{num-xser}Allows number without series and suppresses word "number"
% \QandA{WORD NUMBER CAPITALIZED FOR NUMBER AND SERIES}{c}{number-cap}Capitalize word `number' as: "Number 123"
% \QandA{WORD CHAPTER CAPITALIZED}{c}{chapter-cap}Capitalize word `chapter' as: `Chapter 42'
% \QandA{COMBINING NUMBER AND SERIES}{x}{series-number}Series number as: `Springer Lecture Notes No. 125'
% \QandA{POSITION OF NUMBER AND SERIES}{b}{numser-booktitle}After book title and conference address, and before editors 
% \QandA{VOLUME AND SERIES FOR BOOKS/COLLECTIONS}{s}{ser-vol}Series, vol. 23
% \QandA{VOLUME AND SERIES FORMATTING}{y}{ser-rm}format series roman , even when used with volume
% \QandA{WORD VOLUME CAPITALIZED FOR VOLUME AND SERIES}{y}{volume-cap}Capitalize word `volume', as: `Volume 7 in Lecture Series'
% \QandA{POSITION OF VOLUME AND SERIES FOR INCOLLECTION, INBOOK, AND INPROCEEDINGS}{e}{ser-ed}Series and volume after booktitle and before editors
% \QandA{JOURNAL NAME PUNCTUATION}{x}{jnm-x}Space after journal name
% \QandA{PAGES IN BOOK}{*}{pg-bk,book-chapter-pages}As chapter and page: chapter 42, page 345
% \QandA{PUBLISHER IN PARENTHESES}{d}{pub-date}Publisher with address and date in parentheses (Oxford, 1994)
% \QandA{EMPTY PUBLISHER PARENTHESES}{y}{ay-empty-pub-parens-x}eliminate parentheses altogether if nothing inside
% \QandA{PUBLISHER POSITION}{}{pre-pub}Publisher before volume, chapter, pages 
% \QandA{}{}{pre-edn}Edition before publisher
% \QandA{}{p}{pre-pub,pre-edn}Edition, publisher, volume, chapter, pages
% \QandA{ISBN NUMBER}{*}{isbn}Include ISBN for books, booklets, etc.
% \QandA{ISSN NUMBER}{*}{issn}Include ISSN for periodicals
% \QandA{DOI NUMBER}{a}{doi-link,doi}Doi forms a link to the publication, anchored to the volume or title
% \QandA{EDITOR IN COLLECTIONS}{b}{edby}In booktitle, edited by ..  (where .. is names)
% \QandA{PUNCTUATION BETWEEN SECTIONS (BLOCKS)}{c}{blk-com}Comma between blocks 
% \QandA{FINAL PUNCTUATION}{c}{fin-endbibitem}Command at end instead of period 
% \QandA{ABBREVIATE WORD `PAGES'}{a}{pp}`Page' abbreviated as p. or pp.
% \QandA{ABBREVIATE WORD `EDITORS'}{a}{ed}`Editor' abbreviated as ed. or eds.
% \QandA{OTHER ABBREVIATIONS}{a}{abr}Abbreviations of such words
% \QandA{ABBREVIATION FOR `EDITION'}{a}{ednx}`Edition' abbreviated as `ed' 
% \QandA{EDITION NUMBERS}{n}{ord}Numerical editions as 1st, 2nd, 3rd, etc
% \QandA{STORED JOURNAL NAMES}{a}{jabr}Abbreviated journal names 
% \QandA{FONT OF `ET AL'}{i}{etal-it}Italic et al 
% \QandA{ADDITIONAL REVTeX DATA FIELDS}{r}{revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation}Include REVTeX data fields collaboration, eid, eprint, archive, url, translation
% \QandA{SLACcitation FIELD}{}{SLACcitation}Produce SLACcitation field
% \QandA{NUMPAGES DATA FIELD}{*}{numpages-x}Do not include numpages field 
% \QandA{URL ADDRESS}{*}{url,url-prefix-x}URL without prefix (default: `URL ')
% \QandA{REFERENCE COMPONENT TAGS}{b}{bibinfo}Reference component tags like \cmd\bibinfo in the content of \cmd\bibitem
% \QandA{ELEMENT TAGS}{b}{bibfield}Element tags like \cmd\bibfield in the content of \cmd\bibitem
% \QandA{COMPATIBILITY WITH PLAIN TEX}{*}{nfss}Use LaTeX commands which may not work with Plain TeX
% \end{enumerate}
%
% A file \file{apsrev.dbj} file equivalent to the following should result:
% \begin{verbatim}
%\input docstrip
%\preamble
%----------------------------------------
%*** REVTeX-compatible Phys Rev 2010-02-12 ***
%\endpreamble
%\postamble
%End of customized bst file
%\endpostamble
%\keepsilent
%\askforoverwritefalse
%\def\MBopts{\from{merlin.mbs}{%
%  head,\MBopta}
%\from{physjour.mbs}{\MBopta}
%\from{geojour.mbs}{\MBopta}
%\from{photjour.mbs}{\MBopta}
%\from{merlin.mbs}{tail,\MBopta}}
%\def\MBopta{%
%  ay,%: Author-year with some non-standard interface
%  nat,%: Natbib for use with natbib v5.3 or later
%  lang,%: Use language field to switch hyphenation patterns for title
%  pres,pres-bf,%: Presentation, speaker bold face 
%  seq-no,%: Citation order (unsorted, only meaningful for numericals)
%  vonx,%: Sort without von part (de la Maire after Mahone)
%  nm-init,ed-au,%: Initials + surname (J. F. Smith)
%  jnrlst,%: Junior comes last as Smith, John, Jr.
%  nmft,nmft-def,%: User defined author font (\bibnamefont)
%  fnm-def,%: First names in user defined font (\bibfnamefont)
%  nmfted,%: Editors incollection like authors font
%  nmand-rm,%: `And' in normal font (JONES and JAMES)
%  lab,lab-def,%: User defined citation font (\citenamefont)
%  and-rm,%: Cited `and' in normal font 
%  keyxyr,%: Year blank when KEY replaces missing author (for natbib 7.0)
%  blkyear,%: Missing date left blank 
%  yr-par,%: Year in parentheses as (1993)
%  dtrev,%: Date as year month 
%  date-nil-x,%: If date is empty, then do not produce the surrounding punctuation (parens, brackets, colon, comma)
%  tit-qq,%: Title and punctuation in double quotes (``Title,'' ..)
%  inproceedings-chapter,%: produce pages after chapter, just as in InBook
%  jtit-x,%: Title is ignored
%  inproceedings-chapter,%: produce pages after chapter just as in InBook
%  article-booktitle,%: format booktitle 
%  article-series,%: article can has series
%  jttl-rm,%: Journal name normal font
%  journal-address,%: Include address field (in parentheses) along with journal name
%  book-bt,%: Field `booktitle', or if absent field `title', is book title 
%  thesis-title-o,%: Title is optional: no warning issued if empty
%  trtit-b,%: Tech. report title like books 
%  techreport-institution-par,%: format tech report institution like book publisher
%  vol-bf,%: Volume bold as {\bf vol}(num)
%  vnum-x,%: Journal vol, without number as 34
%  volp-com,%: Volume with comma as vol(num), ppp
%  jpg-1,%: Only start page number 
%  book-editor-booktitle,%: Book permits empty author, produces title before editor in this case
%  inbook-editor-booktitle,%: Allow using both title/booktitle, both author/editor
%  bookaddress,%: Italic booktitle followed by bookaddress in roman
%  num-xser,%: Allows number without series and suppresses word "number"
%  number-cap,%: Capitalize word `number' as: "Number 123"
%  chapter-cap,%: Capitalize word `chapter' as: `Chapter 42'
%  series-number,%: Series number as: `Springer Lecture Notes No. 125'
%  numser-booktitle,%: After book title and conference address, and before editors 
%  ser-vol,%: Series, vol. 23
%  ser-rm,%: format series roman , even when used with volume
%  volume-cap,%: Capitalize word `volume', as: `Volume 7 in Lecture Series'
%  ser-ed,%: Series and volume after booktitle and before editors
%  jnm-x,%: Space after journal name
%  pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,%: As chapter and page: chapter 42, page 345
%  pub-date,%: Publisher with address and date in parentheses (Oxford, 1994)
%  ay-empty-pub-parens-x,%: eliminate parentheses altogether if nothing inside
%  pre-pub,pre-edn,%: Edition, publisher, volume, chapter, pages
%  isbn,%: Include ISBN for books, booklets, etc.
%  issn,%: Include ISSN for periodicals
%  doi-link,doi,%: Doi forms a link to the publication, anchored to the volume or title
%  edby,%: In booktitle, edited by ..  (where .. is names)
%  blk-com,%: Comma between blocks 
%  fin-endbibitem,%: Command at end instead of period 
%  pp,%: `Page' abbreviated as p. or pp.
%  ed,%: `Editor' abbreviated as ed. or eds.
%  abr,%: Abbreviations of such words
%  ednx,%: `Edition' abbreviated as `ed' 
%  ord,%: Numerical editions as 1st, 2nd, 3rd, etc
%  jabr,%: Abbreviated journal names 
%  etal-it,%: Italic et al 
%  revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,%: Include REVTeX data fields collaboration, eid, eprint, archive, url, translation
%  SLACcitation,%: Produce SLACcitation field
%  numpages-x,%: Do not include numpages field 
%  url,url-prefix-x,%: URL without prefix (default: `URL ')
%  bibinfo,%: Reference component tags like \bibinfo in the content of \bibitem
%  bibfield,%: Element tags like \bibfield in the content of \bibitem
%  nfss,%: Use LaTeX commands which may not work with Plain TeX
%,{%
%  }}
%\generate{\file{apsrev4-2.bst}{\MBopts}}
%\endbatchfile
% \end{verbatim}
%
% \subsubsection{Comparing apsrev.bst and apsrmp.bst}\label{sec:CompRevRmp}
% These two bibliographic styles differ as follows:
% \file{apsrev.dbj} has the following guard codes, which \file{apsrmp.dbj} does not:
% \begin{itemize}
% \CandE{seq-no}%
%    Citation order (unsorted, like unsrt.bst)
% \CandE{nm-init,ed-au}%
%    Initials + surname (J. F. Smith)
% \CandE{blkyear}%
%    Missing date left blank 
% \CandE{date-nil-x}%
%    If date is empty, then do not produce the surrounding punctuation (parens, brackets, colon, comma)
% \CandE{inproceedings-chapter}%
%    produce pages after chapter, just as in InBook
% \CandE{techreport-institution-par}%
%    format tech report institution like book publisher
% \CandE{vnum-x}%
%    Journal vol, without number as `34'
% \CandE{pub-date}%
%    Publisher with address and date in parentheses (Oxford, 1994)
% \CandE{pre-pub}%
%    Edition, publisher, volume, chapter, pages. Note that both use guard code pre-edn.
% \end{itemize}
%
% \file{apsrmp.dbj} has the following guard codes, which \file{apsrev.dbj} does not:
% \begin{itemize}
% \CandE{nm-rev1}%
%    Only first name reversed, initials (AGU style: Smith, J. F., H. K. Jones)
% \CandE{dt-beg}%
%    Date after authors 
% \CandE{vnum-sp}%
%    Journal vol (num) as `34 (2)'
% \CandE{pp-last}%
%    Pages at end, but before any notes
% \CandE{pub-par}%
%    Publisher in parentheses
% \CandE{school-par}%
%    School/address in parens: `(school, address)' 
% \CandE{bkedcap}%
%    `Name Editor,' as above, editor upper case
% \CandE{and-com}%
%    Comma even with 2 authors as `Tom, and Harry'
%    
% \end{itemize}
%
% We ensure that the journal substyle has the first word
% in the matter by installing the (default) APS code 
% later on (see Section~\ref{sec:aps-defaults}).
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\authoryear@sw}
% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 457) Endnotes to be sorted in with numerical citations.}%
% Numerical citations: default value of \cmd\authoryear@sw\ is false.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@booleanfalse\authoryear@sw
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\bibpunct}
% The following commands effectively establish the style in which \cmd\cite\ commands are
% formatted.
% You can think of them as the second needed component for the bibliography.
% 
% Set up for APS numerical citations (once the packages are loaded). 
% The journal substyle can override these choices.
%
% Note that, prior to \classname{natbib} version 8.21, changing \cmd\NAT@sort\ at this late hour would not be totally effective;
% you would have to give \classname{natbib} the relevant options at load time.
% From version 8.21 on, \cmd\NAT@sort\ and \cmd\NAT@cmprs\ are not bound at all. 
% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/19}{For natbib versions before 8.21, \cs{NAT@sort} was consulted only as natbib was being read in. Now it is fully dynamic.}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\appdef\setup@hook{%
 \bibpunct{[}{]}{,}{n}{}{,}%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\pre@bibdata}
% 
% Set up to write endnotes to a .bib file; its data will be incorporated into the bibliography.
%    \begin{macrocode}
 \def\pre@bibdata{\jobname\bibdata@app}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\bibsection}
% We define the sectioning command to use when starting the bibliography.
%
% \changes{4.0rc1}{2001/06/18}{grid changes with push and pop}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\appdef\setup@hook{%
 \def\bibsection{%
  \par
  \onecolumngrid@push
  \begingroup
   \baselineskip26\p@
   \bib@device{\textwidth}{245.5\p@}%
  \endgroup
  \nobreak\@nobreaktrue
  \addvspace{19\p@}%
  \par
  \onecolumngrid@pop
 }%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\bib@device}
% \begin{macro}{\bibpreamble}
% \begin{macro}{\bibsep}
% \begin{macro}{\newblock}
% We define the sectioning command to use when starting the bibliography.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\bib@device#1#2{%
 \hb@xt@\z@{%
  \hb@xt@#1{%
   \hfil
   \phantomsection
   \addcontentsline {toc}{section}{\protect\numberline{}\refname}%
%  \hyper@anchorstart {\@currentHref }%
   \hb@xt@#2{%
    \skip@\z@\@plus-1fil\relax
                           \leaders\hrule height.25 \p@ depth.25 \p@ \hskip\z@\@plus1fil
    \hskip\skip@
    \hskip\z@\@plus0.125fil\leaders\hrule height.375\p@ depth.375\p@ \hskip\z@\@plus0.75fil \hskip\z@\@plus0.125fil
    \hskip\skip@
    \hskip\z@\@plus0.25 fil\leaders\hrule height.5  \p@ depth.5  \p@ \hskip\z@\@plus0.5 fil \hskip\z@\@plus0.25 fil
    \hskip\skip@
    \hskip\z@\@plus0.375fil\leaders\hrule height.625\p@ depth.625\p@ \hskip\z@\@plus0.25fil \hskip\z@\@plus0.375fil
 %  \hskip\skip@
 %  \hfil
   }%
%  \hyper@anchorend
   \hfil
  }%
  \hss
 }%
}%
\appdef\setup@hook{%
 \let\bibpreamble\@empty
 \bibsep\z@\relax
 \def\newblock{\ }%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\bibfont}
% We define the font switch that applies to the body of the bibliography.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\appdef\setup@hook{%
 \def\bibfont{%
  \small
  \@clubpenalty\clubpenalty
 }%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsubsection{Index}%
% FIXME: the following call to \cmd\twocolumn\ appears wrong if we were in two-column grid.
% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{grid changes with ltxgrid}
% \changes{4.0rc1}{2001/06/18}{grid changes with push and pop}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{theindex}{%
 \columnseprule \z@
 \columnsep 35\p@
 \c@secnumdepth-\maxdimen
 \onecolumngrid@push
 \section{\indexname}%
 \thispagestyle{plain}%
 \parindent\z@
 \parskip\z@ plus.3\p@\relax
 \let\item\@idxitem
 \onecolumngrid@pop
}{%
%\onecolumngrid@pop
}%
%
\def\@idxitem{\par\hangindent 40\p@}%
%
\def\subitem{\par\hangindent 40\p@ \hspace*{20\p@}}%
%
\def\subsubitem{\par\hangindent 40\p@ \hspace*{30\p@}}%
%
\def\indexspace{\par \vskip 10\p@ plus5\p@ minus3\p@\relax}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%
% \subsection{Journal- and Pointsize-Specific Code}%
%
% After this substyle is read in, we will execute the code specific to the selected 
% journal: execute the society/journal \file{.rtx} file if it exists, or
% execute the society/journal macro (if the latter is not defined, it will \cmd\relax\ out). 
% Here we define the default journal.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@journal@default{pra}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection{Typesize-Specific Code}%
%
% After this society file is read in, we will process the \cmd\@pointsize-specific
% code. Here we define the default.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@pointsize@default{10}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% Note: the convention in \revtex\ and its substyles is that 
% the substyle must not override any explicit class options
% declared by the document.
% This means that the various Booleans of Section~\ref{sec:options}
% may be assigned here only if they are still undefined at this point.
%
% For the APS, we supply code specific to journals PRA, PRB, PRC, PRD, PRE, PRL, PRX, PRAPPLIED, PRMATERIALS, PRFLUIDS, PRAB (was PRSTAB), PRPER (was PRSTPER), and RMP.
% At present, they are identical,
% with the exception of PRL and RMP.
% We also introduce a new generic physrev style now that all of the Phys. Rev. journals 
% are identical
% In 4.2, we make the inclusion of titles in the bibliography the default
%
% For most all of the APS journals, the journal-dependent 
% code is relatively meager and is therefore embedded in this file.
% However, the RMP code is sufficiently extensive that 
% splitting it out into a separate file is more convenient.
%
% \subsubsection{\classoption{pra}}%
% There is no code specific to \classoption{pra}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\rtx@apspra{%
 \class@info{APS journal PRA selected}%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsubsection{\classoption{prb}}%
% There is no code specific to \classoption{prb}.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\rtx@apsprb{%
 \class@info{APS journal PRB selected}%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsubsection{\classoption{prc}}%
% There is no code specific to \classoption{prc}. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\rtx@apsprc{%
 \class@info{APS journal PRC selected}%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsubsection{\classoption{prd}}%
% There is no code specific to \classoption{prd}. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\rtx@apsprd{%
 \class@info{APS journal PRD selected}%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsubsection{\classoption{pre}}%
% There is no code specific to \classoption{pre}. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\rtx@apspre{%
 \class@info{APS journal PRE selected}%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsubsection{\classoption{prl}}%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\rtx@apsprl{%
 \class@info{APS journal PRL selected}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% In PRL, the default is the \classoption{bibnotes} option,
% and the Acknowledgments section has no head.
%
% The References head is a device that may be described as a lozenge centered on the baseline,
% 71 points wide by 2 points thick, with the ends tapering to a half point in thickness.
% Space above 26 points base to base, below 31 base to base.
%FIXME: this code may confound \classname{geometry}
%    \begin{macrocode}
 \let\frontmatter@footnote@produce\frontmatter@footnote@produce@endnote
 \@booleanfalse\acknowledgments@sw
 \appdef\setup@hook{%
  \def\bibsection{%
   \par
   \begingroup
    \baselineskip26\p@
    \bib@device{\hsize}{72\p@}%
   \endgroup
   \nobreak\@nobreaktrue
   \addvspace{19\p@}%
  }%
 }%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Implement length checking.
% Use the \classname{times} and \classname{mathtime} packages,
% plus whatever other processing is required
% to make the formatted output be true
% to the metrics of the journal.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\appdef\setup@hook{%
  \lengthcheck@sw{%
   \RequirePackage{times}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Wait. Do not use mathtime after all. APS has their own way of doing math pi, involving
% Adobe Mathematical Pi and other fonts.
%    \begin{verbatim}
%  \RequirePackage{mathtime}%
%    \end{verbatim}
%    \begin{macrocode}
  }{}%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% A PRL does not have numbered sections.
%    \begin{macrocode}
 \c@secnumdepth=-\maxdimen
%    \end{macrocode}
% Note: we defer this code until after type size file is read in.
%    \begin{macrocode}
 \appdef\setup@hook{%
  \@ifnum{\@pointsize=10\relax}{%
   \lengthcheck@sw{%
    \def\large{%
     \@setfontsize\large{12.5}{14\p@}%
    }%
    \def\normalsize{%
     \@setfontsize\normalsize{10.5}\@xiipt
     \abovedisplayskip 6\p@ \@plus6\p@ \@minus5\p@
     \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
     \abovedisplayshortskip  \abovedisplayskip
     \belowdisplayshortskip \abovedisplayskip
     \let\@listi\@listI
    }%
    \def\small{%
     \@setfontsize\small{9.5}\@xipt
     \abovedisplayskip 5\p@ \@plus5\p@ \@minus4\p@
     \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
     \abovedisplayshortskip  \abovedisplayskip
     \belowdisplayshortskip \abovedisplayskip
     \let\@listi\@listI
    }%
    \DeclareMathSizes{12.5}{12.5}{9}{6}%
    \DeclareMathSizes{10.5}{10.5}{7.5}{5}%
    \DeclareMathSizes{9.5}{9.5}{7.0}{5}%
   }{%
    \def\normalsize{%
     \@setfontsize\normalsize\@xpt\@xiipt
     \abovedisplayskip 10\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus5\p@
     \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
     \abovedisplayshortskip  \abovedisplayskip
     \belowdisplayshortskip \abovedisplayskip
     \let\@listi\@listI
    }%
   }%
  }{}%
 }%
 \textheight = 694.0\p@
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% End of \classoption{prl} code.
%    \begin{macrocode}
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsubsection{\classoption{prper}}%
% There is no code specific to \classoption{prper}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\rtx@apsprper{%
 \class@info{APS journal PRPER selected}%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsubsection{\classoption{prab}}%
% There is no code specific to \classoption{prab}. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\rtx@apsprab{%
 \class@info{APS journal PRAB selected}%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsubsection{\classoption{prx}}%
% There is no code specific to \classoption{prx}. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\rtx@apsprx{%
 \class@info{APS journal PRX selected}%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsubsection{\classoption{prapplied}}%
% There is no code specific to \classoption{prapplied}. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\rtx@apsprapplied{%
 \class@info{APS journal PRApplied selected}%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsubsection{\classoption{prmaterials}}%
% There is no code specific to \classoption{prmaterials}. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\rtx@apsprmaterials{%
 \class@info{APS journal PRMaterials selected}%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsubsection{\classoption{prfluids}}%
%  PRFluids uses a one-column format for journal format, but if authors want this, they should use the onecolumn option and not the reprint option.
% Parsing of documentclass options is rather involved and hard to control precisely enough to have the correct behavior using the reprint option.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\rtx@apsprfluids{%
 \class@info{APS journal PRFluids selected}%
 \@booleanfalse\titlepage@sw
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsubsection{\classoption{physrev}}%
% There is no code specific to \classoption{physrev}. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\rtx@apsphysrev{%
 \class@info{APS unified Physical Review journal style selected}%
%    \begin{macrocode}
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsubsection{\classoption{rmp}}%
% If this option has been selected, we will read in the needed code from the file \file{apsrmp.rtx}. 
%
% \subsection{Establish APS Defaults}\label{sec:aps-defaults}
%
% \begin{macro}{\footinbib@sw}
% All APS journals except RMP effectively invoke the \classoption{footinbib} option.
% We rely on the RMP-specific code to override this assignment. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@booleantrue\footinbib@sw
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@bibdataout@init}
% \begin{macro}{\@bibdataout@aps}
% \changes{4.1o}{2010/02/12}{(AO, 580) Control .bst at run time.}%
% Procedure \cmd\@bibdataout@aps\ has the job of writing the control record into the
% job's \cmd\jobname\filename{.bib} file, where it will adjust the options to \filename{.bst} processing. 
% It is installed into the initialization procedure \cmd\@bibdataout@init, and its meaning 
% is set by the society (APS) and journal. 
% For all but RMP, we select the Physical Review style.
% For the latter case, we change the meaning, per the code in \file{apsrmp.rtx}.
% 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\appdef\@bibdataout@rev{\@bibdataout@aps}%
\def\@bibdataout@aps{%
 \immediate\write\@bibdataout{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% An entry that controls processing of the \filename{.bst} file has entry type \texttt{@CONTROL}. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
  @CONTROL{%
   apsrev42Control%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Say whether we want long bibliography style (the default), or the abbreviated style.
% \changes{4.2b}{2017/11/22}{(MD) MD - not sure why these parameters were different previously. Made them match except for title.}%
% Use binary flags on control.* flags in bst file to set appropriate parameters
% author = 08 corresponds to initials, jrnlst
% editor = 1 corresponds to format identical to authors
% title = 0  means to include title in journal references if present; title ="" means omit the title even if present (this should be the only difference between long and short bib styles)
% year = 1 corresponds to truncate
% page = 0 corresponds to using single page number rather than a range
%    \begin{macrocode}
   \longbibliography@sw{%
    ,author="08",editor="1",pages="0",title="0",year="1"% 
   }{%
    ,author="08",editor="1",pages="0",title="",year="1"%
   }%
  }%
 }%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Place a \cmd\citation\ into the auxiliary file corresponding to this entry. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
 \if@filesw
  \immediate\write\@auxout{\string\citation{apsrev42Control}}%
 \fi
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\place@bibnumber}
% \begin{macro}{\@bibstyle}
% We install code that will select the presentation for \cmd\bibitem s
% and govern the \BibTeX\ processing.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\place@bibnumber\place@bibnumber@inl
\def\@bibstyle{apsrev\substyle@post}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \begin{verbatim}
%\appdef\setup@hook{%
% \longbibliography@sw{%
% \appdef\@bibstyle{long}%
% }{}%
%}%
% \end{verbatim}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{APS Sanity Checking}\label{sec:aps-sanity}
% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/20}{(AO, 524) Makes no sense if citations are superscript numbers and so are footnotes}
%
% Rule: if \cmd\place@bibnumber\ is \cmd\place@bibnumber@sup\ 
% (citations are numbered and set superscript),
% then it makes no sense for \cmd\footinbib@sw\ to be \cmd\false@sw\ 
% (footnotes set in the bibliography, as endnotes). 
% If both conditions prevailed, then the document would have footnotes
% and citations both as superscript arabic numbers, but independently numbered, 
% which would be confusing. 
%
% Any society that provides for both superscript numbered citations as well as for 
% numbered footnotes should check for this same condition, and deal with it. 
%
% Note: an alternative would be for footnotes to use the same sequence of footnote devices
% that are used by the frontmatter footnotes 
% (\cmd\frontmatter@thefootnote\ instead of arabic numbers). 
%
% In this case, we would want to refrain from resetting \cmd\c@footnote\ at the end of 
% the title page formatting.
% We would also want to treat body footnotes identically to frontmatter footnotes: 
% the assignments in \cmd\titleblock@produce\ would persist throughout the document.
%
% But APS do not choose to go that route. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\appdef\setup@hook{%
 \@ifx{\place@bibnumber\place@bibnumber@sup}{%
  \footinbib@sw{}{%
   \class@warn{Citations are superscript numbers: footnotes must be endnotes; changing to that configuration}%
   \@booleantrue\footinbib@sw
  }%
 }{}%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% 
% Here ends the substyle for society APS.
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</aps>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%
% \section{The \classoption{rmp} journal substyle: the \texttt{rmp} module}
%
% The file \file{apsrmp.rtx} is read in by the \classname{revtex4} document class
% if \cmd\@society\ has the value \classoption{aps}
% and \cmd\@journal\ has the value \classoption{rmp}.
%
% It is read at the end of the \file{aps.rtx}, so all definitions
% and assignments in that file are operative unless overridden here.
%
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%<*rmp>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% Protect this file from being read in by anything but \revtex.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\ifx\undefined\substyle@ext
 \def\@tempa{%
  \endinput
  \GenericWarning{I must be read in by REVTeX! (Bailing out)}%
 }%
 \expandafter\else
  \def\@tempa{}%
 \expandafter\fi\@tempa
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% Protect this file from being read in as a society instead of a journal.
% In such a case, \cmd\@journal\ will be undefined. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@ifxundefined\@journal{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% One alternative: abort the document.
% Another alternative: try to recover: force load the aps society file
%    \begin{macrocode}
 \class@warn{Please specify the REVTeX options [aps,rmp]!}%
 \@@end
}{}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Log the journal substyle.
%    \begin{macrocode}
 \class@info{APS journal RMP selected}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection{Frontmatter}%
%
% We assign the titlepage style for RMP; a document instance 
% may override by invoking one of the class options of \revtex.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\clo@groupedaddress
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@setup}
% 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\frontmatter@setup{%
 \normalfont\sffamily\raggedright
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\PACS@warn}
% Per Mark Doyle, RMP  never displays the PACS, so they don't want the `use showpacs' warning spit out.
%\changes{4.2b}{2017/11/22}{(MD) PACS are obsolete altogether now}%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\PACS@warn{RMP documents do not display PACS and PACS are obsolete. Your \string\pacs\space will be ignored}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@title@above}
% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@title@format}
% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@title@below}
% 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\frontmatter@title@above{}%
\def\frontmatter@title@format{\Large\bfseries\raggedright}% HelveticaNeue-Medium(Italic) 14pt.
\def\frontmatter@title@below{\addvspace{12\p@}}% 24pt b-b down to first author
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@authorformat}
% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Rag the right even more: .8\cs{hsize}. Also, assign \cs{@totalleftmargin}.}%
% \changes{4.1b}{2008/06/29}{(AO, 455) Be nice to a list within the abstract (assign \cs{@totalleftmargin}).}
% Set the rag to a milder value, because we want to do true ragged right
% typesetting, as opposed to the \LaTeX\ default, which gives very poor results.
%
% Note: author font is 9.8bp. 19.2bp/14.3bp above/below.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\frontmatter@authorformat{%
 \preprintsty@sw{\vskip0.5pc\relax}{}%
 \@tempskipa\@flushglue
 \@flushglue\z@ plus.8\hsize
 \raggedright\advance\leftskip.5in\relax
 \@flushglue\@tempskipa
 \parskip\z@skip
 \@totalleftmargin\leftskip
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@affiliationfont}
% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{As with author formatting, rag the right more, and assign \cs{@totalleftmargin}. Also neutralize \cs{def@after@address}.}%
% \changes{4.1b}{2008/06/29}{(AO, 455) Be nice to a list within the abstract (assign \cs{@totalleftmargin}).}
% The hook \cmd\frontmatter@affiliationfont\ controls the formatting of affiliations and affiliation groups.
% The hook \cmd\frontmatter@above@affilgroup\ is invoked just before proceeding with author/affiliation processing.
% The \cmd\frontmatter@above@affiliation\ is the amount of space above affiliations in the \classoption{groupedaddress} style,
% and \cmd\frontmatter@above@affiliation@script\ is that for \classoption{superscriptaddress}.
%
% Note: affiliation font is 9.03/10.4bp, 14.3bp/19.2bp b-b above/below
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\frontmatter@affiliationfont{% Helvetica 9/10.2
 \small\slshape\selectfont\baselineskip10.5\p@\relax
 \@tempskipa\@flushglue
 \@flushglue\z@ plus.8\hsize
 \raggedright\advance\leftskip.5in\relax
 \@flushglue\@tempskipa
 \@totalleftmargin\leftskip
 \let\def@after@address\def@after@address@empty
}%
\def\frontmatter@above@affilgroup{\addvspace{7.2\p@}}% additional leading above an author
\def\frontmatter@above@affiliation{\addvspace{5.3\p@}}%
\def\frontmatter@above@affiliation@script{}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% Set up the default RMP style for title block authors and affiliations.
% We assign the titlepage style for RMP; a document instance 
% may override by invoking one of the class options of \revtex.
% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{The \texttt{rmp} journal substyle selects \texttt{groupedaddress} by default.}%
% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
%
% This command should override the effect of the 
% corresponding command in the society substyle,
% and any document class option bearing on same will in turn override. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\clo@groupedaddress
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@RRAP@format}
% \changes{4.1b}{2008/06/29}{(AO, 455) Be nice to a list within the abstract (assign \cs{@totalleftmargin}).}
% Note: in RMP, if we are not in preprint mode, the date will not be produced.
%
% Note: Helvetica C/lc, 8.98bp, space above: 16.3bp b-b.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\frontmatter@RRAP@format{%
  \addvspace{7.3\p@}%
  \small
  \raggedright\advance\leftskip.5in\relax
 \@totalleftmargin\leftskip
}%
\def\produce@RRAP#1{%
  \@if@empty{#1}{}{%
   \@ifvmode{\leavevmode}{}%
   \unskip(\ignorespaces#1\unskip)\quad
  }%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@abstractheading}
% Space above 21.8bp b-b.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\frontmatter@abstractheading{%
 \preprintsty@sw{%
  \begingroup
   \centering\large
   \abstractname
   \par
  \endgroup
  \vspace{.5pc}%
 }{}%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@abstractfont}
% TimesTen 8.93bp/9.6bp X 360bp, indented 36bp, with 21.9/37.6bp b-b above/below
% \changes{4.1b}{2008/06/29}{(AO, 455) Be nice to a list within the abstract (assign \cs{@totalleftmargin}).}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\frontmatter@abstractfont{%
 \footnotesize
 \hsize360\p@
 \leftskip=0.5in
 \parindent\z@
 \@totalleftmargin\leftskip
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@preabstractspace}
% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter@postabstractspace}
% Space above and space below abstract in title block.
% Should be 22/36 points base-to-base.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\frontmatter@preabstractspace{7.7\p@}%
\def\frontmatter@postabstractspace{24.6\p@}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% FIXME: Not done: PACS.
% FIXME: TOC: Head is same as \section: HelveticaNeue 8.98. 32/22bp b-b above/below,
%             Body: TimesTen 8/10.5.
%
% \subsection{General Text}%
%
% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
% If not in preprint mode, RMP sets the type size to 10/12 point. Note: s/b 11.6bp leading
%FIXME: define \cmd\normalsize\ only if nobody else has done so. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
 \appdef\setup@hook{%
  \preprintsty@sw{}{%
   \def\normalsize{%
    \@setsize\normalsize{12pt}\xpt\@xpt
    \abovedisplayskip 10\p@ plus2\p@ minus5\p@
    \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
    \abovedisplayshortskip  \abovedisplayskip
    \belowdisplayshortskip \abovedisplayskip
    \let\@listi\@listI
   }%
  }%
 }%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% Footnote mods:
% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) class file must set \cs{splittopskip}; fine tune \cs{skip}\cs{footins}; \cs{footnoterule} defined in terms of \cs{skip}\cs{footins}}%
%    \begin{macrocode}
 \footnotesep 9.25pt
 \skip\footins 36pt plus 4pt minus 12pt
 \def\footnoterule{%
  \dimen@\skip\footins\divide\dimen@\thr@@
  \kern-\dimen@\hrule width.5in\kern\dimen@
 }%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%
% \subsection{Sectioning}
% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Use \cs{setup@hook} to initialize all.}
% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/01}{Section numbering via procedures \cs{secnums@rtx} and \cs{secnums@arabic}.}
%
% We override the meaning of \cmd\secnums@rtx. 
% The class option \classoption{secnumarabic} will continue to work.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\secnums@rtx{%
 \@ifxundefined\thepart{%
  \def\thepart{\Roman{part}}%
 }{}%
 \@ifxundefined\thesection{%
  \def\thesection       {\Roman{section}}%
  \def\p@section        {}%
 }{}%
 \@ifxundefined\thesubsection{%
  \def\thesubsection    {\Alph{subsection}}%
  \def\p@subsection     {\thesection.}%
 }{}%
 \@ifxundefined\thesubsubsection{%
  \def\thesubsubsection {\arabic{subsubsection}}%
  \def\p@subsubsection  {\thesection.\thesubsection.}%
 }{}%
 \@ifxundefined\theparagraph{%
  \def\theparagraph     {\alph{paragraph}}%
  \def\p@paragraph      {\thesection.\thesubsection.\thesubsubsection.}%
 }{}%
 \@ifxundefined\thesubparagraph{%
  \def\thesubparagraph  {\arabic{subparagraph}}%
  \def\p@subparagraph   {\thesection.\thesubsection.\thesubsubsection.\theparagraph.}%
 }{}%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% In RMP, put a period (.), followed by `nut space', after the section number.
% Also, hang the section number (the \LaTeX\ default).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1\endcsname.\hskip0.5em\relax}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% Note that we wish to set the section head uppercase, so we use
% David Carlisle's \cmd\MakeTextUppercase. However, because this procedure effectively 
% parses its argument (looking for things to \emph{not} translate), it has to be invoked
% in such a way that the argument of the \cmd\section\ command is passed to it as its
% own argument. 
%
% To accomplish this, we use the \cmd\@hangfrom@\ hook, which was developed for this 
% purpose.
% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Add \cs{@hangfroms@section}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
 \def\section{%
  \@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{0.8cm plus1ex minus.2ex}{0.4cm}%
  {%
   \small\sffamily\bfseries\selectfont
   \raggedright
   \parindent\z@
  }%
 }%
 \def\@hangfrom@section#1#2#3{\@hangfrom{#1#2}\MakeTextUppercase{#3}}%
 \def\@hangfroms@section#1#2{#1\MakeTextUppercase{#2}}%
 \def\subsection{%
  \@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{0.8cm plus1ex minus.2ex}{0.4cm}%
  {%
   \small\sffamily\bfseries
   \raggedright
   \parindent\z@
  }%
 }%
 \def\subsubsection{%
  \@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}{.8cm plus1ex minus.2ex}{0.4cm}%
  {%
   \small\sffamily\selectfont
   \raggedright
   \parindent\z@
  }%
 }%
 \def\paragraph{%
  \@startsection{paragraph}{4}{\z@}{.8cm plus1ex minus.2ex}{-1em}%
  {%
   \small\slshape\selectfont
   \raggedright
   \parindent\z@
  }%
 }%
 \def\subparagraph{%
  \@startsection{subparagraph}{4}{\parindent}{3.25ex plus1ex minus.2ex}{-1em}%
  {\normalsize\bfseries\selectfont}%
 }%
%
 \setcounter{tocdepth}{4}% FIXME: has no effect
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \begin{macro}{\appendix}
% \begin{macro}{\@hangfrom@appendix}
% \begin{macro}{\@hangfroms@appendix}
% \begin{macro}{\@appendixcntformat}
% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Add \cs{@hangfroms@section}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\appdef\appendix{%
 \let\@hangfrom@section\@hangfrom@appendix
 \let\@sectioncntformat\@appendixcntformat
}%
\def\@hangfrom@appendix#1#2#3{%
 #1%
 \@if@empty{#2}{%
  #3%
 }{%
  #2\@if@empty{#3}{}{:\ #3}%
 }%
}%
\def\@hangfroms@appendix#1#2{%
 #1\appendixname\@if@empty{#2}{}{:\ #2}%
}%
\def\@appendixcntformat#1{\appendixname\ \csname the#1\endcsname}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsection{Figure and Table Caption Formatting}
% \begin{macro}{\@makecaption}
% \changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Break out \cs{@caption@fignum@sep}}
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\setlength\belowcaptionskip{2\p@}
\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{%
  \vskip\abovecaptionskip
  \vbox{%
   \flushing
   \small\rmfamily
   \noindent
   #1\@caption@fignum@sep#2\par
  }%
  \vskip\belowcaptionskip
}%
\def\@caption@fignum@sep{\nobreak\hskip.5em plus.2em\ignorespaces}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Citations and Bibliography}%
%
% Customize \revtex\ for the journal substyle;
% this task requires three components:
% a \BibTeX\ \file{.bst} style file,
% customizing code for \file{natbib}, and
% customizations of the \env{thebibliography} environment.
%
% \begin{macro}{\@bibstyle}
% Define the argument of the \cmd\bibliographystyle\ command
% (if the document does not do so).
%
% The user must have installed a \file{.bst} file of the corresponding name.
% This file will then be used by \BibTeX\ when compiling the document's \file{.bbl} file.
%
%  To generate \file{apsrmp.bst}, use \classname{custom-bib} version 3.89d1 or later.
%  Run the \file{.bst} generator, \file{makebst.tex}, with the following options:
%
% \def\QandA#1#2#3{\item#1: \textbf{#2}: \texttt{#3}---}%
% \def\CandE#1{\item\relax\texttt{#1}---}%
% \begin{enumerate}
% \QandA{STYLE OF CITATIONS}{a}{ay}Author-year with some non-standard interface
% \QandA{AUTHOR}{*}{nat}Natbib for use with natbib v5.3 or later
% \QandA{LANGUAGE FIELD}{l}{lang}Use language field to switch hyphenation patterns for title
% \QandA{PRESENTATIONS}{b}{pres,pres-bf}Presentation, speaker bold face 
% \QandA{ORDER ON VON PART }{x}{vonx}Sort without von part (de la Maire after Mahone)
% \QandA{AUTHOR NAMES}{a}{nm-rev1}Only first name reversed, initials (AGU style: Smith, J. F., H. K. Jones)
% \QandA{POSITION OF JUNIOR }{*}{jnrlst}Junior comes last as Smith, John, Jr.
% \QandA{TYPEFACE FOR AUTHORS IN LIST OF REFERENCES}{u}{nmft,nmft-def}User defined author font (\cmd\bibnamefont)
% \QandA{FONT FOR FIRST NAMES }{u}{fnm-def}First names in user defined font (\cmd\bibfnamefont)
% \QandA{EDITOR NAMES IN INCOLLECTION ETC}{a}{nmfted}Editors incollection like authors font
% \QandA{FONT FOR `AND' IN LIST}{r}{nmand-rm}`And' in normal font (JONES and JAMES)
% \QandA{FONT OF CITATION LABELS IN TEXT }{u}{lab,lab-def}User defined citation font (\cmd\citenamefont)
% \QandA{FONT FOR `AND' IN CITATIONS }{r}{and-rm}Cited `and' in normal font 
% \QandA{LABEL WHEN AUTHORS MISSING }{*}{keyxyr}Year blank when KEY replaces missing author (for natbib 7.0)
% \QandA{DATE POSITION}{b}{dt-beg}Date after authors 
% \QandA{DATE FORMAT }{m}{yr-com}Date preceded by comma as `, 1993'
% \QandA{INCLUDE MONTHS}{m}{aymth}Include month in date 
% \QandA{REVERSED DATE }{r}{dtrev}Date as year month 
% \QandA{TRUNCATE YEAR }{*}{note-yr}Year text full as 1990--1993 or `in press'
% \QandA{TITLE OF ARTICLE}{d}{tit-qq}Title and punctuation in double quotes (``Title,'' ..)
% \QandA{TITLE PRESENT IN ARTICLE, INCOLLECTION, AND INPROCEEDINGS}{x}{jtit-x}Title is ignored
% \QandA{INPROCEEDINGS CHAPTER AND PAGES, LIKE INBOOK}{y}{inproceedings-chapter}produce pages after chapter just as in InBook
% \QandA{ARTICLE BOOKTITLE PRESENT}{?}{article-booktitle}format booktitle 
% \QandA{ARTICLE SERIES PRESENT}{?}{article-series}article can has series
% \QandA{JOURNAL NAME FONT}{r}{jttl-rm}Journal name normal font
% \QandA{JOURNAL NAME WITH ADDRESS}{y}{journal-address}Include address field (in parentheses) along with journal name
% \QandA{BOOK TITLE FIELDS}{y}{book-bt}Field `booktitle', or if absent field `title', is book title 
% \QandA{THESIS TITLE OPTIONAL}{?}{thesis-title-o}Title is optional: no warning issued if empty
% \QandA{TECHNICAL REPORT TITLE}{b}{trtit-b}Tech. report title like books 
% \QandA{JOURNAL VOLUME}{b}{vol-bf}Volume bold as {\bf vol}(num)
% \QandA{JOURNAL VOL AND NUMBER}{s}{vnum-sp}Journal vol (num) as 34 (2)
% \QandA{VOLUME PUNCTUATION}{c}{volp-com}Volume with comma as vol(num), ppp
% \QandA{PAGE NUMBERS}{f}{jpg-1}Only start page number 
% \QandA{POSITION OF PAGES}{e}{pp-last}Pages at end but before any notes
% \QandA{BOOK EDITOR W/O AUTHOR}{}{book-editor-booktitle}Book permits empty author, produces title before editor in this case
% \QandA{INBOOK PERMITS TITLE, BOOKTITLE, AUTHOR, EDITOR}{a}{inbook-editor-booktitle}Allow using both title/booktitle, both author/editor
% \QandA{CONFERENCE ADDRESS FOR BOOK, INBOOK, INCOLLECTION, INPROCEEDINGS, PROCEEDINGS}{a}{bookaddress}Italic booktitle followed by bookaddress in roman
% \QandA{NUMBER AND SERIES FOR BOOK, INBOOK, INCOLLECTION, INPROCEEDINGS, PROCEEDINGS}{*}{num-xser}Allows number without series and suppresses word "number"
% \QandA{WORD NUMBER CAPITALIZED FOR NUMBER AND SERIES}{c}{number-cap}Capitalize word `number' as: "Number 123"
% \QandA{WORD CHAPTER CAPITALIZED}{c}{chapter-cap}Capitalize word `chapter' as: `Chapter 42'
% \QandA{COMBINING NUMBER AND SERIES}{x}{series-number}Series number as: `Springer Lecture Notes No. 125'
% \QandA{POSITION OF NUMBER AND SERIES}{b}{numser-booktitle}After book title and conference address, and before editors 
% \QandA{VOLUME AND SERIES FOR BOOKS}{s}{ser-vol}Series, vol. 23
% \QandA{VOLUME AND SERIES FORMATTING}{y}{ser-rm}format series roman , even when used with volume
% \QandA{WORD VOLUME CAPITALIZED FOR VOLUME AND SERIES}{y}{volume-cap}Capitalize word `volume', as: `Volume 7 in Lecture Series'
% \QandA{POSITION OF VOLUME AND SERIES FOR INCOLLECTION, INBOOK, AND INPROCEEDINGS}{e}{ser-ed}Series and volume after booktitle and before editors
% \QandA{JOURNAL NAME PUNCTUATION}{x}{jnm-x}Space after journal name
% \QandA{PAGES IN BOOK}{*}{pg-bk,book-chapter-pages}As chapter and page: chapter 42, page 345
% \QandA{PUBLISHER IN PARENTHESES}{p}{pub-par}Publisher in parentheses 
% \QandA{EMPTY PUBLISHER PARENTHESES}{y}{ay-empty-pub-parens-x}eliminate parentheses altogether if nothing inside
% \QandA{PUBLISHER POSITION}{e}{pre-edn}Edition before publisher
% \QandA{SCHOOL}{p}{school-par}school/address in parens: `(school, address)' 
% \QandA{ISBN NUMBER}{*}{isbn}Include ISBN for books, booklets, etc.
% \QandA{ISSN NUMBER}{*}{issn}Include ISSN for periodicals
% \QandA{DOI NUMBER}{a}{doi-link,doi}Doi forms a link to the publication, anchored to the volume or title
% \QandA{`EDITOR' AFTER NAMES}{a}{bkedcap}`Name Editor,' as above, editor upper case
% \QandA{EDITOR IN COLLECTIONS}{b}{edby}In booktitle, edited by ..  (where .. is names)
% \QandA{PUNCTUATION BETWEEN SECTIONS }{c}{blk-com}Comma between blocks 
% \QandA{FINAL PUNCTUATION}{c}{fin-endbibitem}Command at end instead of period 
% \QandA{ABBREVIATE WORD `PAGES' }{a}{pp}`Page' abbreviated as p. or pp.
% \QandA{ABBREVIATE WORD `EDITORS'}{a}{ed}`Editor' abbreviated as ed. or eds.
% \QandA{OTHER ABBREVIATIONS}{a}{abr}Abbreviations of such words
% \QandA{ABBREVIATION FOR `EDITION' }{a}{ednx}`Edition' abbreviated as `ed' 
% \QandA{EDITION NUMBERS}{n}{ord}Numerical editions as 1st, 2nd, 3rd, etc
% \QandA{STORED JOURNAL NAMES}{a}{jabr}Abbreviated journal names 
% \QandA{COMMA BEFORE `AND'}{c}{and-com}Comma even with 2 authors as `Tom, and Harry'
% \QandA{FONT OF `ET AL'}{i}{etal-it}Italic et al 
% \QandA{ADDITIONAL REVTeX DATA FIELDS}{r}{revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation}Include REVTeX data fields collaboration, eid, eprint, archive, url, translation
% \QandA{SLACcitation FIELD}{?}{SLACcitation}Produce SLACcitation field
% \QandA{NUMPAGES DATA FIELD}{*}{numpages-x}Do not include numpages field 
% \QandA{REFERENCE COMPONENT TAGS}{b}{bibinfo}Reference component tags like \cmd\bibinfo\ in the content of \cmd\bibitem
% \QandA{ELEMENT TAGS}{b}{bibfield}Element tags like \cmd\bibfield\ in the content of \cmd\bibitem
% \QandA{COMPATIBILITY WITH PLAIN TEX}{*}{nfss}Use LaTeX commands which may not work with Plain TeX
% \end{enumerate}
%
% A file \file{apsrmp.dbj} file equivalent to the following should result:
% \begin{verbatim}
%\input docstrip
%\preamble
%----------------------------------------
%*** REVTeX-compatible RMP 2010-02-12 ***
%\endpreamble
%\postamble
%End of customized bst file
%\endpostamble
%\keepsilent
%\askforoverwritefalse
%\def\MBopts{\from{merlin.mbs}{%
%  head,\MBopta}
%\from{physjour.mbs}{\MBopta}
%\from{geojour.mbs}{\MBopta}
%\from{photjour.mbs}{\MBopta}
%\from{merlin.mbs}{tail,\MBopta}}
%\def\MBopta{%
%  ay,%: Author-year with some non-standard interface
%  nat,%: Natbib for use with natbib v5.3 or later
%  lang,%: Use language field to switch hyphenation patterns for title
%  pres,pres-bf,%: Presentation, speaker bold face 
%  vonx,%: Sort without von part (de la Maire after Mahone)
%  nm-rev1,%: Only first name reversed, initials (AGU style: Smith, J. F., H. K. Jones)
%  jnrlst,%: Junior comes last as Smith, John, Jr.
%  nmft,nmft-def,%: User defined author font (\bibnamefont)
%  fnm-def,%: First names in user defined font (\bibfnamefont)
%  nmfted,%: Editors incollection like authors font
%  nmand-rm,%: `And' in normal font (JONES and JAMES)
%  lab,lab-def,%: User defined citation font (\citenamefont)
%  and-rm,%: Cited `and' in normal font 
%  keyxyr,%: Year blank when KEY replaces missing author (for natbib 7.0)
%  dt-beg,%: Date after authors 
%  yr-par,%: Year in parentheses as (1993)
%  dtrev,%: Date as year month 
%  date-nil-x,%: If date is empty, then do not produce the surrounding punctuation (parens, brackets, colon, comma)
%  tit-qq,%: Title and punctuation in double quotes (``Title,'' ..)
%  inproceedings-chapter,%: produce pages after chapter, just as in InBook
%  jtit-x,%: Title is ignored
%  inproceedings-chapter,%: produce pages after chapter just as in InBook
%  article-booktitle,%: format booktitle 
%  article-series,%: article can has series
%  jttl-rm,%: Journal name normal font
%  journal-address,%: Include address field (in parentheses) along with journal name
%  book-bt,%: Field `booktitle', or if absent field `title', is book title 
%  thesis-title-o,%: Title is optional: no warning issued if empty
%  trtit-b,%: Tech. report title like books 
%  techreport-institution-par,%: format tech report institution like book publisher
%  vol-bf,%: Volume bold as {\bf vol}(num)
%  vnum-sp,%: Journal vol (num) as 34 (2)
%  volp-com,%: Volume with comma as vol(num), ppp
%  jpg-1,%: Only start page number 
%  pp-last,%: Pages at end but before any notes
%  book-editor-booktitle,%: Book permits empty author, produces title before editor in this case
%  inbook-editor-booktitle,%: Allow using both title/booktitle, both author/editor
%  bookaddress,%: Italic booktitle followed by bookaddress in roman
%  num-xser,%: Allows number without series and suppresses word "number"
%  number-cap,%: Capitalize word `number' as: "Number 123"
%  chapter-cap,%: Capitalize word `chapter' as: `Chapter 42'
%  series-number,%: Series number as: `Springer Lecture Notes No. 125'
%  numser-booktitle,%: After book title and conference address, and before editors 
%  ser-vol,%: Series, vol. 23
%  ser-rm,%: format series roman , even when used with volume
%  volume-cap,%: Capitalize word `volume', as: `Volume 7 in Lecture Series'
%  ser-ed,%: Series and volume after booktitle and before editors
%  jnm-x,%: Space after journal name
%  pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,%: As chapter and page: chapter 42, page 345
%  pub-par,%: Publisher in parentheses 
%  ay-empty-pub-parens-x,%: eliminate parentheses altogether if nothing inside
%  pre-edn,%: Edition before publisher
%  school-par,%: school/address in parens: `(school, address)' 
%  isbn,%: Include ISBN for books, booklets, etc.
%  issn,%: Include ISSN for periodicals
%  doi-link,doi,%: Doi forms a link to the publication, anchored to the volume or title
%  bkedcap,%: `Name Editor,' as above, editor upper case
%  edby,%: In booktitle, edited by ..  (where .. is names)
%  blk-com,%: Comma between blocks 
%  fin-endbibitem,%: Command at end instead of period 
%  pp,%: `Page' abbreviated as p. or pp.
%  ed,%: `Editor' abbreviated as ed. or eds.
%  abr,%: Abbreviations of such words
%  ednx,%: `Edition' abbreviated as `ed' 
%  ord,%: Numerical editions as 1st, 2nd, 3rd, etc
%  jabr,%: Abbreviated journal names 
%  and-com,%: Comma even with 2 authors as `Tom, and Harry'
%  etal-it,%: Italic et al 
%  revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,%: Include REVTeX data fields collaboration, eid, eprint, archive, url, translation
%  SLACcitation,%: Produce SLACcitation field
%  numpages-x,%: Do not include numpages field 
%  url,url-prefix-x,%: URL without prefix (default: `URL ')
%  bibinfo,%: Reference component tags like \bibinfo in the content of \bibitem
%  bibfield,%: Element tags like \bibfield in the content of \bibitem
%  nfss,%: Use LaTeX commands which may not work with Plain TeX
%,{%
%  }}
%\generate{\file{apsrmp4-2.bst}{\MBopts}}
%\endbatchfile
% \end{verbatim}
%
% For a comparison between apsrmp.bst and apsrev.bst, see Section~\ref{sec:CompRevRmp}. 
%
% \changes{4.1c}{2008/08/15}{Document class option longbibliography via \cs{substyle@post}}
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@bibstyle{apsrmp\substyle@post}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\authoryear@sw}
% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 457) Endnotes to be sorted in with numerical citations.}%
% Author-year citations: default value of \cmd\authoryear@sw\ is true.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@booleantrue\authoryear@sw
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@bibdataout@rmp}
% \changes{4.1o}{2010/02/12}{(AO, 580) Control .bst at run time.}%
% When the journal is RMP, the meaning of the procedure \cmd\@bibdataout@aps\ needs to be different 
% because of the way the author names are formatted. In other respects, it is the same. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@bibdataout@aps{%
 \immediate\write\@bibdataout{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% An entry that controls processing of the \filename{.bst} file has entry type \texttt{@CONTROL}. 
% This entry's cite key is \texttt{apsrmp41Control}, which serves as a version number.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  @CONTROL{%
   apsrmp41Control%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Say whether we want long bibliography style (the default), or the abbreviated style. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
   \longbibliography@sw{%
    ,author="03",editor="0",pages="1",title="0",year="0"%
   }{%
    ,author="0B",editor="0",pages="0",title="0",year="1"% TeXSupport
   }%
  }%
 }%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Place a \cmd\citation\ into the auxiliary file corresponding to this entry. 
%    \begin{macrocode}
 \if@filesw
  \immediate\write\@auxout{\string\citation{apsrmp41Control}}%
 \fi
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\bibpunct}
% \begin{macro}{\bibsection}
% \begin{macro}{\bibpreamble}
% \begin{macro}{\newblock}
% \begin{macro}{\bibhang}
% \begin{macro}{\bibsep}
% \begin{macro}{\cite}
% The following commands effectively establish the style in which \cmd\cite\ commands are
% formatted.
% You can think of them as the second needed component for the bibliography.
% 
% Set up for author-year citations:
% when \cmd\NAT@set@cites\ executes (at \envb{document} time), the \cmd\@biblabel\ will
% be set to \cmd\NAT@biblabel.
%
% Per Karie Friedman (friedman@phys.washington.edu), multiple citations are separated by semicolons, e.g., 
% (Jones, 1999; Abbott and Smith, 2000; Wortley, 2001a), 
% and 
% multiple citations by the same author by commas, e.g., 
% Abela et al. (1995, 1997a, 1997b).
% The third argument of \cmd\bibpunct\ handles the former.
%
% The fifth argument puts a comma after the author when the year is not in parens:
% (Lee et al., 1996).
%
% Incidently, this \cmd\bibpunct\ command specifies the \classname{natbib} default values. 
%
% We define the sectioning command to use when starting the bibliography.
%
% We change \classname{natbib}'s \cmd\NAT@def@citea\ procedure to effect more elaborate
% punctuation for RMP: see item 473: 
% \cmd\cite\ order punctuation: ``If possible, \cmd\textcite should put the word 'and' between two citations and before the last citation in a list of 3 or more.''
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\appdef\setup@hook{%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% We define the punctuation to use in the \cmd\cite\ command's production.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
 \bibpunct{(%)
 }{%(
 )}{;}{a}{,}{,}%
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% We define the sectioning command to use when starting the bibliography.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
 \def\bibsection{%
  \expandafter\section\expandafter*\expandafter{\refname}%
  \@nobreaktrue
 }%
 \let\bibpreamble\@empty
 \def\newblock{\ }%
 \bibhang10\p@
 \bibsep\z@
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% Per Mark Doyle, \cmd\cite\ is mapped to \cmd\citep\ in RMP.
% \changes{4.1i}{2009/10/23}{(AO, 541) Defer assignment of \cs{cite} until after natbib loads}
%    \begin{macrocode}
 \let\cite\citep
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% End of code to be delayed until after \classname{natbib} loads.
%    \begin{macrocode}
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\footinbib@sw}
% Footnotes in bibliography are consistent only with numbered citations,
% and are particularly nasty under \classname{natbib}:
% the packcage will automatically change to numbered references if
% any \cmd\bibitem\ commands lack the optional argument.
% Therefore, we must uninvoke it now, even if invoked by the document.
% The same is quietly done with 
% \classname{natbib}'s \classoption{mcite} and \classoption{compress} options. 
% 
% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/15}{(AO, 523) Add class option nomerge, to turn off new natbib 8.3 syntax}
% (AO 523) I changed the code that alters \cmd\NAT@merge\ so that it will not override
% when \cmd\NAT@merge\ has been set to \cmd\z@.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\@booleanfalse\footinbib@sw
\appdef\setup@hook{%
 \footinbib@sw{%
  \class@warn{%
   Footnotes in bibliography are incompatible with RMP.^^J%
   Undoing the footinbib option.
  }%
  \@booleanfalse\footinbib@sw
 }{}%
 \@ifnum{\NAT@merge>\@ne}{\let\NAT@merge\@ne}{}%
 \def\NAT@cmprs{\z@}%
}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\eprint}
% RMP requires the \cmd\eprint\ field in the bib entry to be set off with the word ``eprint''.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\eprint#1{eprint #1}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{Table of Contents}
%
% We set up for auto-sizing of certain TOC elements.
% 
% To do this, we override the definitions for 
% the default TOC font (\cmd\toc@@font),
% and define
% formatting for the needed elements (\cmd\l@\dots).
% Finally, we activate the autosizing by 
% assigning \cmd\toc@pre\ and \cmd\toc@post.
%
% \begin{macro}{\toc@@font}
% \changes{4.1a}{2008/01/19}{(AO, 461) Change the csname revtex uses from @dotsep to ltxu@dotsep. The former is understood in mu. (What we wanted was a dimension.)}%
% Set the formatting characteristics of the auto-indenting part
%  of the TOC.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\toc@@font{%
 \footnotesize\rmfamily
 \def\\{\space\ignorespaces}%
}%
\def\ltxu@dotsep{5.5pt}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\l@section}
% Determine which TOC elements are automatically indented.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\tocleft@{\z@}%
\def\tocdim@min{5\p@}%
\def\l@section{%
 \l@@sections{}{section}% Implicit #3#4
}%
\def\l@subsection{%
 \l@@sections{section}{subsection}% Implicit #3#4
}%
\def\l@subsubsection{%
 \l@@sections{subsection}{subsubsection}% Implicit #3#4
}%
%\def\l@subsubsection#1#2{}%
\def\l@paragraph#1#2{}%
\def\l@subparagraph#1#2{}%
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% Activate the TOC processing.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\toc@pre\toc@pre@auto
\let\toc@post\toc@post@auto
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
%</rmp>
%    \end{macrocode}
%
%
% \Finale
% %Here ends the programmer's documentation.
% \endinput
%
\endinput